VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS: Installation Diagrams - Interfoni System Diagrams.pdf · i index door...

I

INDEX

DOOR PHONE - VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS: INSTALLATION DIAGRAMS

IND

EX

- D

OO

R P

HO

NE

- V

IDE

O D

OO

R P

HO

NE

SY

ST

EM

S:

INS

TA

LL

AT

ION

DIA

GR

AM

S

DOOR PHONE - VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS: Installation Diagrams

DOOR PHONE - VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS:

Installation Diagrams

http://www.urmetdomus.come-mail:[email protected]

MT 101-014D (Rev. December 2006)

IND

EX

- D

OO

R P

HO

NE

- V

IDE

O D

OO

R P

HO

NE

SY

ST

EM

S:

INS

TA

LL

AT

ION

DIA

GR

AM

S

II

INDEX



III

INDEX


IND

EX

- D

OO

R P

HO

NE

- V

IDE

O D

OO

R P

HO

NE

SY

ST

EM

S:

INS

TA

LL

AT

ION

DIA

GR

AM

S


INSTALLATION DIAGRAMS Sec. 1

(Index at the beginning of section)

DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS

4+N WIRE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS Sec. 1A (Index at the beginning of section)

1+1 WIRE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS Sec. 1B


TRADITIONAL CALL SYSTEMS Sec. 1C


VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS

COAX ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS Sec. 1D


5-WIRE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS Sec. 1E


INSTRUCTIONS FOR INTERCHANGE OF VARIOUS POWER SUPPLIES

AND MONITORS Sec. 1F


EASIVOICE SYSTEM Sec. 2


IND

EX

- D

OO

R P

HO

NE

- V

IDE

O D

OO

R P

HO

NE

SY

ST

EM

S:

INS

TA

LL

AT

ION

DIA

GR

AM

S

IV

INDEX



NUMERIC INDEX

Diagram Code Sec. Pag.SC101-0249E .................................................................... 1a..........32SC101-0252D.................................................................... 1a..........22SC101-0289 I .................................................................... 1a..........28SC101-0440B.................................................................... 1c ............ 4SC101-0441C.................................................................... 1c ............ 6SC101-0461B.................................................................... 1c ............ 8SC101-0482D.................................................................... 1a..........58SC101-0567E .................................................................... 1a..........54SC101-0578G ................................................................... 1a..........42SC101-0735D ................................................................... 1a..........60SC101-0791E ................................................................... 1a..........24SC101-0839D ................................................................... 1a..........44SC101-0844E ................................................................... 1a..........50SC101-0858C ................................................................... 1a............ 2SC101-0861D ................................................................... 1a..........36SC101-0863E ................................................................... 1a..........38SC101-0866G ................................................................... 1a..........52SC101-0932C ................................................................... 1b............ 4SC101-0937B ................................................................... 1b............ 8SC101-1070C ................................................................... 1a..........26SC101-1133C ................................................................... 1a............ 4SC101-1134E ................................................................... 1a..........56SC101-1135F .................................................................... 1b............ 2SC101-1209C ................................................................... 1a..........14SC101-1210B ................................................................... 1b............ 6SC101-1217C ................................................................... 1a..........10SC101-1218C ................................................................... 1b..........10SC101-1226B ................................................................... 1a..........30SC101-1240A ................................................................... 1a..........16SC101-1241B ................................................................... 1b..........12SC101-1243B ................................................................... 1a..........40SC101-1244A ................................................................... 1a..........48SC101-1247A ................................................................... 1c ............ 2SC101-1248A ................................................................... 1a..........20SC101-1249A ................................................................... 1a..........46SC101-1259B ................................................................... 1a............ 3SC101-1269A ................................................................... 1b..........16SC101-1272A ................................................................... 1a..........34SC101-1273A ................................................................... 1a............ 6SC101-1280A ................................................................... 1a..........12SC101-1282A ................................................................... 1a..........18SC101-1284A ................................................................... 1a............ 8SC101-1327 ...................................................................... 1b..........14

Diagram Code Sec. Pag.SV102-0782D .................................................................... 1d..........31SV102-1241D .................................................................... 1d..........36SV102-1349E .................................................................... 1d..........34SV102-1469D .................................................................... 1d..........30SV102-1470C .................................................................... 1e..........27SV102-1574C .................................................................... 1d..........30SV102-1609E .................................................................... 1d............ 6SV102-1710D .................................................................... 1e..........27SV102-1712F .................................................................... 1e..........26SV102-2066D .................................................................... 1d............ 8SV102-2081B .................................................................... 1e............ 5SV102-2082C .................................................................... 1e............ 4SV102-2132E .................................................................... 1d..........32SV102-2631E .................................................................... 1d............ 4SV102-2633H .................................................................... 1e............ 6SV102-2806F .................................................................... 1e..........14SV102-2892D .................................................................... 1d..........14SV102-2902G.................................................................... 1e............ 8SV102-2913B .................................................................... 1e..........10SV102-2934C .................................................................... 1d..........16SV102-2935E .................................................................... 1d..........22SV102-2970D .................................................................... 1d..........24SV102-2972D .................................................................... 1d..........26SV102-2978C .................................................................... 1e..........29SV102-3060B .................................................................... 1e..........18SV102-3063A .................................................................... 1d..........38SV102-3078B .................................................................... 1d..........18SV102-3079A .................................................................... 1d..........20SV102-3092D .................................................................... 1e..........12SV102-3094D .................................................................... 1e..........20SV102-3118C .................................................................... 1d..........10SV102-3119A .................................................................... 1d..........12SV102-3121C .................................................................... 1e..........16SV102-3122E .................................................................... 1e..........24SV102-3146D .................................................................... 1d............ 2SV102-3147B .................................................................... 1e............ 2SV102-3166C .................................................................... 1e..........22SV102-3219....................................................................... 1d..........46SV102-3220....................................................................... 1d..........48SV102-3227....................................................................... 1d..........42SV102-3228A .................................................................... 1d..........40SV102-3229B .................................................................... 1d..........53SV102-3235....................................................................... 1d..........44SV102-3238....................................................................... 1e..........27SV102-3239....................................................................... 1e..........26SV102-3240....................................................................... 1e..........27SV102-3257A .................................................................... 1d.......... 28SV102-3294....................................................................... 1d..........50SV102-3295....................................................................... 1d..........51SV102-3296A .................................................................... 1d..........52

sec.1 −−−− 1

INS

TA

LL

AT

ION

DIA

GR

AM

S


INSTALLATION DIAGRAMS

SECTION 1(REV.B)

Download from:www.urmetdomus.comTechnical Manuals area

2 −−−− sec.1

DO

OR

PH

ON

E A

ND

VID

EO

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

M -

DIA

GR

AM

- S

ectio

n 1

SECTION 1 CONTENTS

DOOR PHONE AND VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEM - DIAGRAM


Sec. Pag.INSTALLATION DIAGRAMS

INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLER .......................................................................................................................................................1 ................3 Conductor cross-section.....................................................................................................................................................................1 ................3 Wire laying..........................................................................................................................................................................................1 ................3 Instruction for grounding or not of the electronic locks and push button panels.................................................................................1 ................4 Door opener service ...........................................................................................................................................................................1 ................4 Tv camera unit ....................................................................................................................................................................................1 ................4OPERATING ANOMALIES ....................................................................................................................................................................1 ................4 Background noise in outdoor station systems ....................................................................................................................................1 ................4 Radio frequency picking .....................................................................................................................................................................1 ................4 Non-operation of the call to the loudspeaker ......................................................................................................................................1 ................4 Insuffi cient reception in outdoor station systems................................................................................................................................1 ................4 Whistle or larsen effect .......................................................................................................................................................................1 ................4 Intercoms............................................................................................................................................................................................1 ................4 System check and possible failures outdoor station system control...................................................................................................1 ................5 1- or 2-user basic video door phone system troubleshooting and solutions.......................................................................................1 ................5 Reducing architectural barriers...........................................................................................................................................................1 ................5SYSTEM TYPOLOGIES ........................................................................................................................................................................1 ................6 Door phone systems...........................................................................................................................................................................1 ................6 Video door phone systems .................................................................................................................................................................1 ................6CHOOSING THE RIGHT SYSTEM........................................................................................................................................................1 ................6 Door phone systems...........................................................................................................................................................................1 ................6 Video door phone systems .................................................................................................................................................................1 ................7

DIAGRAM NOTES 1 8

INS

TA

LL

AT

ION

DIA

GR

AM

S

sec.1 −−−− 3DOOR PHONE - VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS: Installation Diagrams


INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLER

INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLER

The products described in this technical manual must be used as expressly intended only, i.e. to build door phone and video door phone systems.Any other use must be considered inappropriate and, them, dangerous. The constructor can not be considered liable for casual damages due to inappropriate, wrong and irrational use.

• The system must be built in compliance with the regulations in force.

• Check that the device is intact after removing it from the packaging. (do not proceed with installation in the event of faults);

• Keep the packaging (plastic bags, polystyrene, etc.) away from children. Packaging is potentially dangerous.

• Before connecting the set install an appropriate separation and protection switch.

• Before connecting the set verify that the data label correspond to the mains ones.

• Ensure that the conditions and data shown in the instruction booklets are respected for the entire life of the device;

• Do not obstruct the openings or fessures for ventilation or heat elimination.

• Before any cleaning or maintenance operation, disconnect the set by means of the system switch.

• In case of failure and/or malfunctioning of the set disconnect it by means of the general switch and do not damage it. (To repair the set contact Urmet after sales services)

• Do not open or tamper with the monitors: HIGH VOLTAGE live parts inside.

• Avoiding knocking or dropping the device to avoid breaking the kinescope with consequent projection of glass fragments.

If the above mentioned prescriptions are not followed, the set safety can be compromised.The installer must verify that the notices for user are present on the slave sets.

CONDUCTOR CROSS-SECTION

• Connection of traditional call door phone, 4+n wire electronic call door phone or coax video door phone systems:

Conductor cross-section depends on the length of the connections and must be able to guarantee a total resistance of less than 5 Ohm on each.

Distance [m] Cross-section [mm2]

Call and speech circuit 50 0,5 100 0,5 200 0,8 300 1,0

Door release circuit 50 0,5 100 0,8 200 1,0 300 1,6

Video circuit (°) 50 0,8 100 1,0 200 1,6 300 2,5

(°) Data in the table refers to the camera and monitor power wires; a 75Ω coax wire (e.g. RG59 U75Ω) is required for the video signal.

In the table, the maximum distance is to be interpreted as between the call station and the furthest door phone or video door phone. For longer distances:A) Suitably increase circuit wire cross-section area for voice and call

circuit.B) Use of a back-up relay for operating door lock circuit is

recommended.C) Installation of a video distributor Ref. 1794/4A is needed for the

coax wire.

In intercom systems it is advisable never to exceed 200 meters.

• Connection of 1+1 wire electronic door phone or 5-wire video door phone systems.

The system works correctly with a maximum total (forwards and backwards) line resistance of 12Ω.

Use the following wire cross-section areas according to distance:

Distance [m] Cross-section [mm2]

Call and speech circuit (terminals 1, 2, CA) 50 0,35 100 0,75 200 1,0

Video door phone power negative (terminal R1) 50 0,75 100 1,5 200 2,5

Video door phone power positive (terminal R2) 50 0,5 100 1,0 200 2,0

Video signal (terminals A, B) 50 0,35 100 0,35 200 0,35 double

Maximum length is between door unit (panel) and the most distant apartment station (door phone or video door phone).Up to two house phones can be connected in parallel.

Note: in all sistem foresee the wires for push button panel lamps lighting with an adequate power transformer (for up to 2 lamps the system transformer can be used), as well as the wires for the electric lock opener next to the door.

WIRE LAYING

The wire laying of systems with different voltages is possible not only in separated conduits but also in the same conduit. In this case all the wires have an insulation suitable to the highest rated voltage. Wires of systems incompatible each others as power and telephones TV antenna, data transmission, must have different conduits and boxes. By using external conduits it is possible to fail to observe this rule, on the condition that the incompatible systems are separated by means of a diaphragm. The internal diameter of the conduits has to be at least 1.3 times the diameter of the circle circumscribed to the wire group that the conduits have to include, with a minimum of 10 mm.Never use telephone cables; false calls may occur in installations with long lines due to problems of cross-talk.

INS

TA

LL

AT

ION

DIA

GR

AM

S

4 −−−− sec.1 DOOR PHONE - VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS: Installation Diagrams


OPERATING ANOMALIES

INSTRUCTION FOR GROUNDING OR NOT OF THE ELECTRONIC LOCKS AND PUSH BUTTON PANELS

According the IEC 64-8/4 Rule Point 411-1.2.4, the electronic device for which measures have been adopted to guarantee that in case of internal failure, the output terminal voltage cannot exceed the indicated values (50 Vac and, 120 Vdc not inverted) are source SELV type (ex BTS). It is the case of the Urmet door phone power supplies for bar mounting that have a double insulation and that is belonging to class II (identifi ed by the double square symbol) and that are conforming to IEC 12/13 Rules. The active parts of the powered circuits (electric locks and push button panels) absolutely have not to be grounded (point 411.1.4.1). Only for information, the power supplies that do not belong to class II but to class I and, therefore, have not a double or intensifi ed insulation, belong to FELV class (ex BTF). In this case both the power supplies and the active parts of the fed circuits have to be grounded.

DOOR OPENER SERVICE

Most apartment stations are equipped with door opener button to operate one or more electrical locks.It is not recommended to act on two different locks with the same button, since the excessive power absorbed by the door opener service might damage the power supply. In this case it is advisable to use house phones equipped with an additional button to open the second lock, or else to use relay switches for servocontrol of the second lock.

TV CAMERA UNIT

To obtain the best reproduction never direct the TV camera towards strong light sources (i.e. sun, lamps, fl ashes, fl ames or refl ections).Normal lighting is supplied by the infrared LEDs included in the TV camera unit. In case it is necessary the additional lamp lighting up for the outdoor vision (in particular with separated TV camera solution) insert a proper relay 788/5 or 788/52 by connecting to the video power supply.The contacts will close the circuit of the lamps fed with an external voltage.

OPERATING ANOMALIES

BACKGROUND NOISE IN OUTDOOR STATION SYSTEMS

If, during a conversation a background noise or a rather strong buzzing are heard, it is necessary to check the power supply and the absence of failures in the componentsOne of the causes for the irregular functioning of the system is the 12V a.c. voltage pick up (for push button panel lamps lighting) from the “-“ terminal of the loudspeaking unit, rather than from the power supply output. In fact, by this mistake, when lamps light up there is a voltage drop in the common wire between power supply and outdoor station that gives - on its turn - the above mentioned background noises during the conversation. Another cause of buzzing depends by long lines systems. The wire 9, that closes on the terminal –12 through the electric lock coil, induce the alternated current in the column. To verify disconnect a wire from electric lock, if the buzzing disappears the cause is located. To eliminate it control the lock by means of a auxiliary relay connected as per following scheme:

RADIO FREQUENCY PICKING

Some times a radio broadcast program can be heard in the door phone handset; this happens when the outdoor station is next to the radio repeater station. By connecting, between terminals “+” and “2” of the loudspeaking unit a 100 nF capacitor, the inconvenience will be overcome.

NON-OPERATION OF THE CALL TO THE LOUDSPEAKER

Check the power supply generates the call sound, by inserting a 45 Ohms loudspeaker between terminals “PS” and “~0” of the power supply.Replace the power unit in the event of a failure.

INSUFFICIENT RECEPTION IN OUTDOOR STATION SYSTEMS

The following cases may occur:1) Insuffi cient reception at both outdoor and indoor stations. In this case it is necessary to verify that power supply voltage

is not lower than 5,7V d.c. If feeding is normal, the insuffi cient reception is caused, in most cases, by a door phone that remains permanently inserted since, if the handset is unhooked, the hook contacts do not disconnect it from the system and therefore the house phones operate as if they were connected in parallel.

2) Insuffi cient reception at outdoor station only. If this occurs only when the outdoor station is in connection with a

certain door phone, the defect can be easily eliminated by acting on the door phone. If, on the contrary, the reception is weak, independently from the door phone connected to the loudspeaking unit, the defect is to be found in the loudspeaking unit itself; therefore it will be necessary to fi rst check that there have been no wire inversions in the connection to terminals “1” and “2” or inversions of “+” and “-“ polarities.

3) Insuffi cient reception at indoor station only. Adjust the loudspeaking unit potentiometer by increasing the

volume EXT.

WHISTLE OR LARSEN EFFECT

Should the system present a “whistle” due to Larsen effect, duly adjust the two volume potentiometers of the loudspeaking unit reducingthe higher yield channel (INT or EXT). A better result is obtained by acting on the internal volume.

INTERCOMS

One of the most common connection mistakes in an intercom system causes the following defect: during test operations the handset gives a background noise and no conversation can take place. This is due to a wrong connection on the power supply negative terminal.

ELECTRIC LOCK

RELAY

From the lock releasesof the

house-phones

HOUSE PHONEPOWER SUPPLY

Lockoperation

INS

TA

LL

AT

ION

DIA

GR

AM

S



OPERATING ANOMALIES

The power supplies have two negative outputs: “-” and “-J”. The latter has a series impedance. If, during the installation, a connection is made on the fi rst output instead of on the second “-J”, the system will not work since the impedance function is missing.

SYSTEM CHECK AND POSSIBLE FAILURES OUTDOOR STATION SYSTEM CONTROL

1) Check that voltage between (+) and (-) terminals is of 6V. If voltage is normal, there should not be:

a) Any badly connected door phone. b) Any door phone with permanently unhooked handset. To make sure that all house phones are properly connected, it is

necessary to measure if between “+” and “1A” and “2” terminals voltage is present.

Under normal conditions, there should be no voltage. If, on the contrary, voltage is present, it means that in one or more house phones both the microphone and the receiver are permanently inserted.

2) Disconnect “+”, “1A” and “2” terminals wires from the loudspeaking unit and measure with the ohmmeter between wires 1A and 2:

• If the result is infi nite the system is in order. • If there is a resistance of about 100 Ohms, some door phone is

always connected. • If the result is 0 Ohms, wire 1A and 2 are in short circuit. To verify the effi ciency of the loudspeaking unit, wires 1A and

2 coming from the installation, must be disconnected and a provisional connection must be made on a perfectly working door phone; if the conversation is audible, the fault will have to be found somewhere else. To locate faults it is necessary to pro-ceed upwards on the cable conduit.

1- OR 2-USER BASIC VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING AND SOLUTIONS

1) No conversation can be established with the door unit: the call tone is heard on the monitor but the monitor does not light up.

Short-circuit between output terminals: the power unit protection has tripped; disconnect power (230 Vac) and carefully check the system wiring again.

2) No conversation can be established with the door unit: no call tone is heard on the monitor and the monitor does not light up. Check:

• Connection between panel button and monitor CA terminal. • Connection between power unit terminal PS and panel button

common. • No short-circuit on power unit “PS” terminal. 3) A conversation can be established with the door unit: the call tone

is heard on the monitor but the monitor does not light up. Check: • Presence of voltage (18-20 Vdc) between monitor terminals

“R2” (+) and “R1” (-).4) A conversation can be established with the door unit: the call tone

is heard on the monitor, the monitor does not light up but the screen is blank.

Check: • Presence of voltage (16-18Vdc) between camera terminals

“+TC” “R1”. • Possible coax interruption or short-circuit.5) No conversation can be established with the door unit: the call

tone is heard on the video door phone and the camera picture appears.

Check: • Presence of voltage (6Vdc) between door unit terminals “+6”

and “-6”.6) The system works correctly but the door lock cannot be released. Check: • Continuity between video door phone “9” and video power unit

“AP” terminals.

All diagrams in this volume can be downloaded from the web site at www.urmetdomus.com, technical diagram area.

REDUCING ARCHITECTURAL BARRIERS

In buildings intended for social activities, such as schools, hospitals, health care centres, cultural centres, etc., and in all other buildings where technical precautions are needed to ensure accessibility by disabled persons, the door phone and video door phone systems must be installed so to be conveniently used by everyone.Specifi cally, avoid installing apartment stations in diffi cult to reach points. Install so that the distance between the fl oor and the upper part of the microphone is 100cm. The panel outside the building must be installed as close as possible to the height of a wheelchair user’s face: the recommended height is from 115 to 125cm from the fl oor.

115 ÷ 125 cm100 cm

INS

TA

LL

AT

ION

DIA

GR

AM

S


Traditional call systems are suitable for making new systems with call signal to a dedicated buzzer fi tted inside the door phone.This type of door phone is suitable for replacing 1030, 930 and 730 model door phone in existing systems and for making intercom systems.

“1+1” wire systems

“1+1” wires systems are available with electronic call option only. These systems are characterised by simple wiring with only 2 wires for each user.They are suitable for making new installations and are most appreciated for use in old buildings to replace an existing call only system (button and bell). The existing service can be transformed into a door phone system without adding wires to the column or in the apartments.In this systems, only the called door phone can pick up the conversation with the visitor (no other users can cut into the call in progress) and open the electrical door lock.

Existing call only system


SYSTEM TYPOLOGIES - CHOOSING THE RIGHT SYSTEM

SYSTEM TYPOLOGIES

DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS

Door phone systems functions include conversation, calling and door opening in a normal electrical system.The following devices are needed to make a basic door phone system:• Panel with buttons and door unit.• Apartment station door phones.• Door phone system power unit.

Door phone systems are split into two families according to the number of wires needed to make the system.


Urmet Domus video door phone systems ensure a high level of user safety; visitors can be recognised at the door (of a detached house, a semi-detached house or a block of fl ats) thanks to the picture which appears on the monitor located inside.The following devices are needed to make a basic video door phone system:• Panel with buttons, door unit and camera.• Apartment station video door phones.• Video door phone system power unit.

Either black and white or colour video door phone systems are available using specifi c monitors and camera.Video door phone installation is simple and quick thanks to the use of specifi c brackets with terminal boards onto which the monitor is fastened.Two system types are available: coax and 5 wires.

CHOOSING THE RIGHT SYSTEM

DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS

“4+n” wire systems

This type of system employs 4 wires (2 for voice in and out, 1 for door phone power ground and 1 for operating the electrical lock) plus one call wire.The system may implement either traditional or electronic call tone options.

Door phones with different designs and colour are available for 4+n wire electronic call systems. The call tone is sent directly to the speaker used for normal communication with the door unit. The tone is a modulated two-tone note (1200 and 750Hz) in this case. Door phones with special functions can be used (privacy indicator and door monitoring LED, voice circuit on button, additional buttons directly on the door phone top). Various accessories are also available (three-tone gong, call volume adjustment kit, etc.).Various doors phones can be connected one to the each other in addition to the door unit for making intercom systems.

KEYA: Door phoneB: Power unitC: PanelD: Electrical lock

B

C

D

A

A

C

D

B

E

E

F

F

G

G

KEYB: 12V transformer C: PanelD: Electrical lockE: Lock release buttonF: Apartment ringerG: Floor call button

INS

TA

LL

AT

ION

DIA

GR

AM

S


“5 wire” systems

These systems are particularly suitable for new installations and for transforming existing door phone systems into video door phone systems without addition other wires in the column and the apartments.Urmet Domus 5 wire video door phone systems (without coax) can be used to make video door phone systems with only 4 wires for powering the monitor and the video signal plus 1 wire for the call signal.The picture only appears on the called monitor. Conversation is private. Users must have been called to connect to the door unit.Simple “1+1” door phones can be connected to the 5 wire video door phone system for offering voice service only.

Existing door phone system

5 wire video door phone system

“1+1” wire door phone system


Coax systems

The construction of a coax video door phone system is similar to that of an electronic call “4+n” door phone system with the addition of video functions. The wires are the same as those shown for the door phone system with the addition of those needed to power the camera and the monitor, in addition to the coax cable for the video signal.This system offers countless possible confi gurations for both black and white and colour installations; it is particularly indicated when there is a long distance between the camera and the monitors.Apartment stations in coax systems can be connected one to another to make intercom systems.Apartment stations in coax systems can be complemented with a wide range of accessories (three-tone gong, Scaitel picture memory module, supplementary buzzer, etc.).Simple “4+n” door phones can be connected to the coax video door phone system for offering voice service only.

C

A

A

D

B

F

F

G

G

KEYA: Door phoneB: 12V transformer C: PanelD: Electrical lockF: Apartment ringerG: Floor call button

F

E

KEYA: Door phone system power unitB: Video power unit C: Electrical lockD: Camera unitE: Door unitF: PanelG: Apartment stationH: Video door phone distribution boxI: Conversation privacy boardL: Door phone

A

C

L

L

G G

G

H

H

G

B

D

E

F

I

C

TC

KEYA: Apartment stationB: Power unitC: Video door unitD: Video distributionE: Electrical lock

A

A

A

A

A

A

D

D

D

B

C

E

TC


CHOOSING THE RIGHT SYSTEM

INS

TA

LL

AT

ION

DIA

GR

AM

S


INSTALLATION DIAGRAMSDIAGRAM NOTES

0,75Cross-sectionarea sq.mm

0,35

Distance m 100

1

20050

Provide two wires for switchingon the push-button panel lightbulbs. Use a power transformersuitable to the number of lightbulbs. The system transformer issufficient for up to 2 bulbs(max 6 W).

C1.002 - MINIMUM WIRECROSS-SECTION AREAS

0,8circuit 1

50Distance

0,5

- The indicated distance is betweendoor unit and most distant door phone.- Lay the wires at a suitable distancefrom power lines (as far away aspossible).

m

0,5

call circuit0,5 1

1,6

200 300100

0,8sq.mm

Door opening


Voice and

sq.mm

1

10,8mm

m

0,20

Diameter

120

1,6

Distance

0,65

Cross-section

0,5

sq.mm

480300200

0,8


area

C4.004 - Use auxiliary relayRef.788/21 or 788/52 for operating thelock in systems with long lines toavoid buzzing.

C4.006 - Sinthesi models only:- Connected jumper ... to ...

C4.007 - Sinthesi models only:See instruction booklet provided withproduct for connecting terminals G/T,~0 and ~12 between modules.

C4.008 - K-Steel models only:all connections are made withterminal boards.

The connection variant is:

S3S1

2

~12

~0

LOCKDOOR PHONE

Ref.788/52

Door Lock

DEVICE

FROM 9 OF

ELECTRIC

12~

POWER SUPPLY Release

DOOR PHONES

RELAY

C4.003

C4.015 - Repeater door phone call inputconnections.

C4.014 - Check that the diode respectsthe polarisation shown in the diagram.

Call repeaterRef.1332/84

Mod.1131Mod.Scaitel

Mod. Atlantico

“4+n”wire

systems

CA CA 2 7

6 6 1 6

“1+1”wire

systems

Mod.1130

“4+n”wire

systems

“1+1”wire

systems

C1.004 - K-Steel models only:Remove the jumpera)... and ...

Use two wires for lighting the panelname tags if not included in the diagram.Use a separate transformer of suitablepower. Transformer Ref.9000/230 is recommendedfor up to 15W-The system power unit is sufficient forup to 6W.

Door phone

Ref.1132/1 T1 T2 T3 T4

Ref.1133/1 T1 T2 T3

Ref.1131/1 A B C D

Terminal equivalence:

K

C4.009 - Important:Use cord pairs.

sec.1 −−−− 9

INS

TA

LL

AT

ION

DIA

GR

AM

S



R2

CA

Maximumdistance

0,50

m

0,35

2,5

Double

0,75

0,5 1,0

1,5

A,B

200

0,350,35

2,0Wires

R1 Sq.mm

0,35

0,75

10050

V5.001 - Wire cross-section area

The diagrams indicate the distancebetween the camera and most distantvideo door phone unit.Normal wires can be used fordistances up to 100 metres. Forhigher distances (up to 200 metres)the wires A and B must be doubled.

V5.004 - On the last distributor,insert two 82 Ohm resistors (provided)between terminals R1-A and R1-B.

Sq.mm

Sq.mm

Sq.mmwires

V5.002 - Use two wires for lighting thepanel name tags if not included in thediagram.Use a separate transformer of suitablepower. Transformer Ref.9000/230 is recommendedfor up to 15W-The system power unit is sufficient forup to 6W.

VD.002 - See the chapter "Demisterpower" in the chosen product manualfor K-Steel camera modules only.

VD.007 = Floor call button.

C4.016 - Sinthesi models only: The call forwarded LEDs on all panelslight up when a call is in progressfrom any station.

C4.017 - Sinthesi models only:The call forwarded LED of the secondarystation in the column to which the callis directed lights up when a call fromthe main panel is in progress.

C4.018 - K-Steel model door units only:connect terminals ~0 and ~12 for nametag lighting.

C4.023 - Set the (TIME) trimmer on thedevice to minimum time.

CU.009 - Provide two wires forswitching on the push-button panellight bulbs.Use a power transformer suitable toethe number of light bulbs.Use of transformer Ref. 9000/230 isrecommended for up to five bulbs(max 15 W).

Video signal

mmq

1,50

Video signal

0,35

-

mmq

mmq

0,75

mmq 0,35

-

AI

1,50

~0

100

The diagrams indicate the distancebetween the thecamera andvideo door phone unit.Normal wires can be used fordistances up to 100 metres. Forhigher distances (up to 200 metres)the wires A and B must be doubled.

doublewires

0,35

-2,50

Power 18V=

C1-C2

Auto power-on

mmq

Wires

Wires

200

~12

Video power

From camera to video door phones

0,35

R1

Video power

m

Power 18V=

0,75

1,5

0,35

50

1,50,5

R2

2,50

0,75

+18

0,75

0,35

Function

mmq

100

0,35

0,35

0,5

0,35

V5.007 - MINIMUM WIRE CROSS-SECTION AREAS

-

Power 12V~

Call 0,75

mmq

m

From power unit to camera

Power 12V~

B

R1

mmq

1,50

0,35

50

mmq

mmq

-

A

0,5

Function

1,50

V5.011 - Connect the wire for switch-onfunction. In this case, connect jumperbetween terminals X2 and R3.

INS

TA

LL

AT

ION

DIA

GR

AM

S



VX.002 - The power unit can powerup to 10 distributors. Use onelocal power unit Ref. 789/2 foreach group of distributors (max.20) after exceeding this limit.

VX.003 - MINIMUM WIRECROSS-SECTION AREAS

Provide two wires for switching onthe push-button panel light bulbs.Use a separate transformer suitableto the number of light bulbs.(Transformer ref. 9000/230 isrecommended for up to 5 bulbs).The system power unit is sufficientfor up to 2 bulbs.

VX.006 - See the instruction bookprovided with the product for fittingthe accessory in the device.

VX.007 - The cross-section area of thewires indicated with must bedouble.

Distance

Normal

COAXIALCABLE

COAXIALCABLE

75 Ohm

m

Sq.mm

50 100 200 300

0,5 0,8 1 1,6

0,8 1 1,6 2,5

Use a normal coaxial wirefor distances up to 300 mAdd a video amplifier forlonger distances.

Wires

R1,R2,+TCWires

Sq.mm

VX.010 - No more than 20 monitorsshould be connected to each column;add video distributors to thecamera output or other device ifthere are more devices.

VX.014 - Dusk switch or similar devicefor switching lights on, whererelevant.

VX.012 - Relay Ref.788/5 or Ref.788/52is needed to prevent that a video doorphone can be switched on while anotherdevice is working and interrupt vision.Connect the PS wire directly to themonitor X1 terminals if the relay isnot fitted.

VX.011 - Close the coaxial wire onthe last monitor in the riser witha 75 Ohm resistance betweenterminals V4 and V5.

VX.013 - Connect the switch-offcircuit Ref. 5330/60 in thepush-button panel and connect wire SN(brown) to the button common. Cut andisolate wire 1 (red).

VX.001 - To use video distributoroutput U5, remove the 75 Ohm resistorfitted on the printed circuit orremove jumper (if existing).

VX.016 - MINIME WIRE CROSS SECTION AREAS

Distance

75 Ohm

m

mmq

300 400 700 1000

1,6 1,75 2,5 4

VX.008 - Connect the devices to afilter and power line protectiondevice.

1

2

IN OUT

2

1

Ref.1332/85

2

1

Ref.1332/86

IN OUT

2

1

NL

N

L

FilterProtection

Neutral

Mains ~

Line ~Earth

Phase

Utility

VX.015 - The power unit Ref.1090/850can power up to 4 devices.Use another power unit for each groupof 4 devices if the system exceedthis capacity.

Voice andcall wires


The video amplifier must be installednear the monitor. Two BNC connectors are required forconnecting the coax wire. Use a RG59(75Ohm) coax for a maximum distanceof 300m.Use video amplifier Ref.1840/250 withRG11 wire for higher distances

sec.1 −−−− 11

INS

TA

LL

AT

ION

DIA

GR

AM

S



VX.018 - Connect the followingjumpers on the device:a) ..... with .....b) ..... with .....c) ..... with .....

VX.023 - Terminal equivalence:- RT (Sentry+)= RD (Atlantico).

VX.021 - Cut or remove the jumpers onthe device(s):- ...-...- ...-...-...-...

VX.025EXAMPLE OF POWER CONNECTION WITHATLANTICO VIDEO DOOR PHONES

R1 R2

R75

RDR1

V3V5V4

R2

R1RD

V3V5V4

R2

VX.032 - MINIME WIRE CROSS SECTION AREASThe section area and the voltage cable(12Vcc 12Vdc)lenght are in functionof the camera intake.See the following table:

Cameraintake

max 300mA

VX.031 - On the device removethe jumper P1 which short circuitthe diode 1N4700. In intercom systemthere is not necessary connect thediode.

Cross sectionarea(mmq)

0,75

1,5

2,5

4

Distance (m)

Cameraintake

Cross sectionarea(mmq)

Distance (m)

150

100

240

50

VX.033 - MINIME WIRE CROSS SECTION AREASThe section area and the voltage cable(12Vcc 12Vdc)lenght are in functionof the camera intake.See the following table:

max 500mA

1

2,5

4 200

125

50

VU.002 - Follow the instructionsprovided with the product forfitting the camera.

2

1 50

0,50,5 1

200 300100

0,8

VX.034 - MINIME WIRE CROSS SECTION AREAS

Distance m

mmqNormalwires

0,50,5 10,8mmqWires

R1, R2, +TC

Call andbuttoncommonwires

0,8 10,5 1,6mmq


Use two wires for lighting the panelname tags if not included in the diagram.Use a separate transformer of suitablepower. Transformer ref. 9000/230 is recommendedfor up to 15W-The system power unit is sufficient forup to 6W.

COAXIALCABLE75 Ohm

VX.028 - For Ref. 5330/60 only: cutand isolate wire 1 (red)

NOTE 1: The electrical lock is shown in the diagrams and must have the following features:

12Vac - 15VA

NOTE 2: The number of devices shown by an X must be evaluated according to the system type to be made.

INS

TA

LL

AT

ION

DIA

GR

AM

S


BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

sec.1a−−−− 1

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


BASIC DIAGRAMS FOR 4+N WIRE DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS

SECTION 1A(REV.D)


SECTION 1A CONTENTS


DO

OR

PH

ON

E A

ND

VID

EO

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

M -

DIA

GR

AM

- S

ectio

n 1A


Diagram Sec. Pag.BASIC DIAGRAMS FOR 4+N WIRE DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS

CONNECTION OF UP TO 2 DOOR PHONES TO 1 DOOR UNIT ................................................................SC101-0858C ..............1a ................2

CONNECTION OF UP TO 2 DOOR PHONES TO 1 DOOR UNIT ................................................................ SC101-1259B ..............1a ................3

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 1 DOOR UNITDoor phone with or without insertion key........................................................................................................SC101-1133C ..............1a ................4

CONNECTION OF 6 DOOR PHONES TO 1 DOOR UNITDoor phones A and B are called individually while door phones C-D-E-F are called in parallel .................... SC101-1273A ..............1a ................6

CONNECTION OF 6 DOOR PHONES TO 1 DOOR UNITDoor phones A and B are called individually while door phones C-D-E-F are called in parallel.Floor call service with differentiated tone.Possibility of timing the door open.................................................................................................................. SC101-1284A ..............1a ................8

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 2 OUTDOOR STATIONSUse the relay box Ref. 788/51 and the power supply Ref. 786/11 .................................................................SC101-1217C ..............1a ............. 10

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONE TO 2 DOOR UNITSDifferentiated calls from door units. Use the power supply wiht relay Ref. 786/15......................................... SC101-1280A ..............1a ............. 12

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 4 OUTDOOR STATIONS ............................................SC101-1209C ..............1a ............. 14

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL COLUMNS OF DOOR PHONES TO 1 MAIN OUTDOOR STATIONEach column is also connected to its own secondary outdoor station.Use the relay box Ref. 788/51 and the power supply Ref. 786/11 ................................................................. SC101-1240A ..............1a ............. 16

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONE COLUMNS TO 1 MAIN DOOR UNIT Each column is connected to a secondary door unit. Differentiated calls from door units.Use the power supply wiht relay Ref. 786/15 ................................................................................................. SC101-1282A ..............1a ............. 18

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES MODEL ATLANTICO TO 1 OUTDOOR STATIONS Floor calls on the supplementary loudspeaker ............................................................................................... SC101-1248A ..............1a ............. 20

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 1 OUTDOOR STATIONConnection of the sound generator to call door phones from the fl oor using the same loudspeaker ............SC101-0252D ..............1a ............. 22

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 1 OUTDOOR STATIONSolution using the three-tone gong kit for differentiated call to the fl oorThe calls from the push button panel are sent with sound generatorThose to the fl oor with add-on device for call Ref. 1132/54 ........................................................................... SC101-0791E ..............1a ............. 24

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 1 DOOR UNITSolution using additional differential fl oor call device Ref. 9854/53................................................................SC101-1070C ..............1a ............. 26

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 1 OUTDOOR STATIONDoor phone “A” can open door during call from panel................................................................................... SC101-0289 II ..............1a ............. 28

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 1 OUTDOOR STATIONDoor open light indicator. Possibility of cutting out calls and respective indications ...................................... SC101-1226B ..............1a ............. 30

INTERCOMMUNICATING CONNECTION OF 2 DOOR PHONES ............................................................... SC101-0249E ..............1a ............. 32

INTERCOMMUNICATING CONNECTION OF 4 DOOR PHONES ............................................................... SC101-1272A ..............1a ............. 34

INTERCOMMUNICATING CONNECTION OF MAXIMUM 13 DOOR PHONES...........................................SC101-0861D ..............1a ............. 36

CONNECTION OF 1 MAIN DOOR PHONE TO 12 SHUNT DOOR PHONES MAXIMUM............................ SC101-0863E ..............1a ............. 38

INTERCOMMUNICATING CONNECTION OF 2 DOOR PHONESWITH THE POSSIBILITY OF REPLY TO 1 OUTDOOR STATIONSingle calls from outdoor station ................................................................................................................... SC101-1243B ..............1a ............. 40

INTERCOMMUNICATING CONNECTION OF 2 DOOR PHONESWITH THE POSSIBILITY OF REPLY TO 1 OUTDOOR STATIONParallel calls from outdoor station. Differentiated calls...................................................................................SC101-0578G ..............1a ............. 42

INTERCOMMUNICATING CONNECTION OF MAXIMUM 13 DOOR PHONESWITH THE POSSIBILITY OF REPLY TO 1 OUTDOOR STATIONSingle calls from outdoor station. Differentiated calls.....................................................................................SC101-0839D ..............1a ............. 44

INTERCOMMUNICATING CONNECTION OF 2 DOOR PHONESWITH THE POSSIBILITY OF REPLY TO 2 OUTDOOR STATIONSingle calls from outdoor station .................................................................................................................... SC101-1249A ..............1a ............. 46

I −−−− sec.1a

SECTION 1A CONTENTS


DO

OR

PH

ON

E A

ND

VID

EO

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

M -

DIA

GR

AM

- S

ectio

n 1A


INTERCOMMUNICATING CONNECTION OF 2 DOOR PHONESWITH THE POSSIBILITY OF REPLY TO 2 OUTDOOR STATIONParallel calls from outdoor station .................................................................................................................. SC101-1244A ..............1a ............. 48

INTERCOMMUNICATING CONNECTION OF MAXIMUM 13 DOOR PHONESWITH THE POSSIBILITY OF REPLY TO 2 OUTDOOR STATIONSSingle calls from the push button panels........................................................................................................ SC101-0844E ..............1a ............. 50

INTERCOMMUNICATING CONNECTION OF MAXIMUM 13 DOOR PHONESWITH THE POSSIBILITY OF REPLY TO 2 OUTDOOR STATIONSParallel calls from the push button panels......................................................................................................SC101-0866G ..............1a ............. 52

CONNECTION OF TWO INTERCOMMUNICATING DOOR PHONE EXTENSIONSTO A SYSTEM WITH DOOR UNITParallel calls from door unit. Differentiated calls............................................................................................. SC101-0567E ..............1a ............. 54

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 1 OUTDOOR STATIONSecrecy of conversation ................................................................................................................................. SC101-1134E ..............1a ............. 56

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 1 DOOR UNITSimultaneous opening of two electrical locks .................................................................................................SC101-0482D ..............1a ............. 58

CONNECTION OF TWO INTERCOM DOOR PHONES WITH POSSIBILITY OF ANSWERING CALLSFROM ONE SECONDARY DOOR UNIT EXTENSION OF AN ELECTRICAL DOOR UNIT SYSTEMParallel calls from outdoor station Differentiated calls ..........................................................................................................................................SC101-0735D ..............1a ............. 60

sec.1a −−−− II

SECTION 1A CONTENTS


DO

OR

PH

ON

E A

ND

VID

EO

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

M -

DIA

GR

AM

- S

ectio

n 1A


4+N DOOR PHONE SYSTEM DIAGRAM CROSS-REFERENCE TABLE

Use of kits

4

22

56

8

40

44

58

26

20

28

30

42

16

18

6

SC101-1133C

SC101-0252D

SC101-1134E

SC101-1284A

SC101-1243B

SC101-0839D

SC101-0482D

SC101-1070C

SC101-1248A

SC101-0289 I

SC101-1226B

SC101-0578G

SC101-1240A

SC101-1282A

SC101-1273A

SC101-0791E 24

1

0

√

K

√

√

√ √√

CONNECTION OF UP TO 2 DOOR PHONES TO 1 DOOR UNIT 3SC101-1259B√ √

CONNECTION OF UP TO 2 DOOR PHONES TO 1 DOOR UNIT 2SC101-0858C√ √

√ √√

√ √√

√

√

√

√

√ √ √

√

√ √

√

√

√

√ √ √ √

√ √ √

√ √ √

√ √

√

√

√

√ √

INTERCOMMUNICATING CONNECTION OF MAXIMUM 8/13 DOOR PHONESWITH THE POSSIBILITY OF REPLY TO 1 OUTDOOR STATIONSingle calls from outdoor station. Differentiated calls

LIST OF AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS

Number of main panels to be installed

Number of secondary panels to be installed

Single calls from panel: each user has its own call button

Calls from panel in parallel: each user has several door phones in the apartmen

Intercom function: users can communicate with each other

Floor calls: users can be called from the outside of the apartment

Differentiated call: the source of the call can be identified

Timed electrical lock: the energising time of the lock can be controlled

Use of devices with low number of DIN modules

MUTE function: possibility of excluding the call tone

Door open control: open door indicated by means of LED

Conversation privacy: users can only talk and listen if called

Operation of two locks at the same time

DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION PAGDIAGRAM

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 1 DOOR UNITDoor phone with or without insertion key

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 1 OUTDOOR STATIONConnection of the sound generator to call door phones from the floor using the same loudspeaker

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 1 OUTDOOR STATIONSolution using the three-tone gong kit for differentiated call to the floor.The calls from the push button panel are sent with sound generator.Those to the floor with add-on device for call Ref. 1132/54

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 1 DOOR UNITSolution using additional differential floor call device Ref. 9854/53

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES MODEL ATLANTICO TO 1 OUTDOOR STATIONS Floor calls on the supplementary loudspeaker

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 1 OUTDOOR STATIONDoor phone “A” can open door during call from panel

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 1 OUTDOOR STATIONSecrecy of conversation

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 1 OUTDOOR STATIONDoor open light indicator. Possibility of cutting out calls and respective indications

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 1 DOOR UNITSimultaneous opening of two electrical locks

CONNECTION OF 6 DOOR PHONES TO 1 DOOR UNITDoor phones A and B are called individually while door phones C-D-E-F are called in parallel

CONNECTION OF 6 DOOR PHONES TO 1 DOOR UNITDoor phones A and B are called individually while door phones C-D-E-F are called in parallel.Floor call service with differentiated tone. Possibility of timing the door open

INTERCOMMUNICATING CONNECTION OF 2 DOOR PHONES WITH THE POSSIBILITYOF REPLY TO 1 OUTDOOR STATIONSingle calls from outdoor station

INTERCOMMUNICATING CONNECTION OF 2 DOOR PHONESWITH THE POSSIBILITY OF REPLY TO 1 OUTDOOR STATIONParallel calls from outdoor station. Differentiated calls

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL COLUMNS OF DOOR PHONES TO 1 MAIN OUTDOOR STATIONEach column is also connected to its own secondary outdoor station.Use the relay box Ref. 788/51 and the power supply Ref. 786/11

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONE COLUMNS TO 1 MAIN DOOR UNIT Each column is connected to a secondary door unit. Differentiated calls from door units.Use the power supply wiht relay Ref. 786/15

K = number of columns with panel

III −−−− sec.1a

SECTION 1A CONTENTS


DO

OR

PH

ON

E A

ND

VID

EO

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

M -

DIA

GR

AM

- S

ectio

n 1A






Calls from panel in parallel: each user has several door phones in the apartment


Floor calls: users can be called from the outside of the apartment

Differentiated call: the source of the call can be identified

Timed electrical lock: the energising time of the lock can be controlled

Use of devices with low number of DIN modules

MUTE function: possibility of excluding the call tone

Door open control: open door indicated by means of LED

Conversation privacy: users can only talk and listen if called

Operation of two locks at the same time

DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION PAG

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 2 OUTDOOR STATIONSUse the relay box Ref. 788/51 and the power supply Ref. 786/11 10

INTERCOMMUNICATING CONNECTION OF 2 DOOR PHONES WITH THE POSSIBILITYOF REPLY TO 2 OUTDOOR STATION. Single calls from outdoor station 46

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONE TO 2 DOOR UNITSDifferentiated calls from door units. Use the power supply wiht relay Ref. 786/15 12

INTERCOMMUNICATING CONNECTION OF MAXIMUM 8/13 DOOR PHONESWITH THE POSSIBILITY OF REPLY TO 2 OUTDOOR STATIONSSingle calls from the push button panels 50

INTERCOMMUNICATING CONNECTION OF MAXIMUM 13 DOOR PHONESWITH THE POSSIBILITY OF REPLY TO 2 OUTDOOR STATIONSParallel calls from the push button panels 52

INTERCOMMUNICATING CONNECTION OF 2 DOOR PHONES WITH THE POSSIBILITYOF REPLY TO 2 OUTDOOR STATION. Parallel calls from outdoor station 48

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 4 OUTDOOR STATIONS 14

INTERCOMMUNICATING CONNECTION OF 2 DOOR PHONES 32

INTERCOMMUNICATING CONNECTION OF 4 DOOR PHONES 34

INTERCOMMUNICATING CONNECTION OF MAXIMUM 8/13 DOOR PHONES 36

38

0 0

N N

N 1

√4 0

2 0

√

√

√ √√

√ √ √

√

√

√ √

√ √

√ √

√√√√

√

√

√

√

NOTE: The diagrams shown in this table can be made using Sinthesi, K-Steel, 725 panel models.

CONNECTION OF 1 MAIN DOOR PHONE TO 7/12 SHUNT DOOR PHONES MAXIMUM

CONNECTION OF TWO INTERCOM DOOR PHONES WITH POSSIBILITY OFANSWERING CALLS FROM ONE SECONDARY DOOR UNIT EXTENSION OF ANELECTRICAL DOOR UNIT SYSTEMParallel calls from outdoor station. Differentiated calls 60

DIAGRAM

SC101-1217C

SC101-1249A

SC101-1280A

SC101-0844E

SC101-0866G

SC101-1244A

SC101-1209C

SC101-0249E

SC101-1272A

SC101-0861D

SC101-0863E

SC101-0735D

CONNECTION OF TWO INTERCOMMUNICATING DOOR PHONE EXTENSIONSTO A SYSTEM WITH DOOR UNITParallel calls from door unit. Differentiated calls 54SC101-0567E

sec.1a −−−− IV

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

2 −−−− sec.1a

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


EQUIPMENT

The following devices are needed for the system illustrated in diagram SC101-0858C:

“4+N” DOOR PHONE KIT DIAGRAMS

N. X One-family kit (1 button) Ref. 1129/501 consisting of: • Smyle panel 1 button with built-in door unit. • 1 Atlantico door phone (with door opener button and 1

additional button). • Power transformer: Ref. 9000/230 (230Vac-18VA, 3 DIN

modules). orN. 1 Two-family kit (2 buttons) Ref. 1129/502 consisting of: • Smyle panel 2 buttons with built-in door unit. • 2 Atlantico door phones (with door opener button and 1

additional button). • Power transformer: Ref. 9000/230 (230Vac-18VA, 3 DIN

modules).

DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.001(*) door phone included in two-family kit only

CONNECTION OF UP TO 2 DOOR PHONES TO 1 DOOR UNIT

5

5

6

8

2

(*)

FUNCTION

Pressing one of the external panel buttons, the bitonal electronic call is sent to the correspondent door phone loudspeaker. When the called door phone handset is unhooked, contact is established and conversation may take place. To operate the electric lock it is suffi cient to press the proper push button.

PS

1

1A2

~-/~

~12~0

CA

126910

CA

126910

~0

~

~

~12

(*)

POWER SUPPLY

Lock Release

MAIN ~

ELECTRICLOCK

SC101-0858C

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

sec. 1a −−−− 3

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


CONNECTION OF UP TO 2 DOOR PHONES TO 1 DOOR UNIT

FUNCTION


EQUIPMENT

The following devices are needed for the system illustrated in diagram SC101-1259B:

“4+N” DOOR PHONE KIT DIAGRAMS

N. 1 One-family kit (1 button) Ref. 1133/301 consisting of: • Sinthesi door unit module with 1 call button Ref. 1145/21 • Door unit Ref. 1145/500 • 1 Atlantico door phone Ref. 1133/1 • 1 fl ush mounting box for 1 module Ref 1145/51 • Module holder with frame for 1 module Ref. 1145/61 • Power unit 230Vac-28VA, 3 DIN modules Ref. 786/11 orN. 1 Two-family kit (2 buttons) Ref. 1133/302 consisting of: • Sinthesi door unit module with 2 call buttons Ref. 1145/22 • Door unit Ref. 1145/500 • 2 Atlantico door phones Ref. 1133/1 • 1 fl ush mounting box for 1 module Ref 1145/51 • Module holder with frame for 1 module Ref. 1145/61 • Power unit 230Vac-28VA, 3 DIN modules Ref. 786/11

DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.001(*) door phone included in two-family kit only

PostoEsterno

CA

126109

G/TT1 T1

-J-6+6~0

~

~12

PS

~

CA

126109

G/TT1 T1

L

+

2-

1A

1

U1G/T ~12

G/T~0

~0~12

U2

(*)

POWER SUPPLYLock Release

MAIN ~

MODULE FOR DOOR UNIT

ELECTRICLOCK

SC101-1259B

5

5

6

8

2

(*)

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

4 −−−− sec.1a

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS



5

5

4+(n-2)

4+(n-1)

4+n

9+n

2

FUNCTION


EQUIPMENT


DOOR PHONE REFERENCES

N. X Door phone Mod. Utopia Grey colour Ref. 1134/1 orN. X Door phone Mod. Atlantico White colour Ref. 1133 orN. X Door phone Mod. Atlantico wiht insertion key White colour Ref. 1133/10

POWER SUPPLY FOR DOOR PHONE SYSTEM REFERENCES

N. 1 Power supply for door phone system 28VA Ref. 786/11

OUTDOOR STATION REFERENCES

Sinthesi model N. X Button modules Ref. 1145/11-/12-/13-/14N. 1 Module with door unit set-up Ref. 1145/20-/21-/22N. 1 Amplifi ed door unit Ref. 1145/500

The panels must be installed in fl ush-mounting boxes with module holder frames or in cases with hood for wall-mounted versions. Refer to “Sinthesi panel” section of Doorphone and Videodoorphone system - product technical manual.

or

K-Steel model N. X Button modules Ref. 1155/11-/12A-/13A-/14AN. 1 Module with door unit Ref. 1155/20-/21-/22A

The panels must be installed in fl ush-mounting boxes with module holder frames or in cases with hood for wall-mounted versions. Refer to “K-Steel modular vandal-proof panel” section of Doorphone and Videodoorphone system - product technical manual.

or

725 model N. 1 Panel with N buttons Mod. 725N. 1 Amplifi ed door unit Ref. 1128/500

For the panels references and the accessories refer to “Panels with anodized Aluminium front plate Mod. 725” section of Doorphone and Videodoorphone system - product technical manual.

or

1128 model N. 1 Front case for door unit Ref. 1128/20-/21N. 1 Door unit Ref. 1128/500N. X Front case Ref. 1128/10-/11N. X Button Ref. 1128/1-/2

For boards of accessories refer to “Wall Mounted Panel Mod. 1128” section of Doorphone and Videodoorphone system - product technical manual.

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

sec.1a−−−− 5

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS



SC101-1133C

(C4.004) Name taglighting

(C4.007)(C4.008)

TO THE FOLLOWINGDOOR PHONES

(C4.006)

6

1

9

2

10

CA

G/T~0

~12

~0~12U2

U1G/T

U3U4

6

1

9

2

10

CA

-J

-6+6

~0

~12

~

~

PS

L

+

2-

1A

1

U1G/T ~12

~0~12

G/T~0

U2

POWER SUPPLYFOR DOOR

PHONE SYSTEMLock ReleaseMAIN ~

TO THE FOLLOWINGMODULE

ELECTRICLOCK

DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.001C4.004

C4.006Sinthesi models only:Connect jumper L with G/T.

C4.007 C4.008

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

6 −−−− sec.1a

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


CONNECTION OF 6 DOOR PHONES TO 1 DOOR UNITDoor phones A and B are called individually

while door phones C-D-E-F are called in parallel

A

B

C

D

E

F

12

2

7

6

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

PARALLEL CALLS

SINGLE CALLS

FUNCTION

By pressing U1 or U2 on the panel inside the building, a two-tone electronic call is sent to the speaker or door phone A or door phone B, respectively. By pressing U3 on the panel, door phones C-D-E-F are all called at the same time.Lift the handset of the called door phones to establish a conversation with the door unit. Simply press the corresponding button to release the electrical door lock.

EQUIPMENT

The following devices are needed for the system illustrated in diagram SC101-1273A:


N. 6 Door phone Mod. Utopia Grey colour Ref. 1134/1 orN. 6 Door phone Mod. Atlantico White colour Ref. 1133




Sinthesi model N. 1 Button modules Ref. 1145/13N. 1 Module with door unit set-up Ref. 1145/20N. 1 Amplifi ed door unit Ref. 1145/500


or

K-Steel model N. 1 Button modules Ref. 1155/13AN. 1 Module with door unit Ref. 1155/20


or

725 model N. 1 Panel with 3 buttons Ref. 1155/13AN. 1 Amplifi ed door unit Ref. 1128/500

or

1128 model N. 1 Front case for door unit Ref. 1128/20-/21N. 1 Door unit Ref. 1128/500N. 3 Button Ref. 1128/1-/2N. 3 Blank module (*) Ref. 1128/30-/31

(*) for small button installation only

For boards of accessories refer to “Wall Mounted PanelMod. 1128” section of Doorphone and Videodoorphone system - product technical manual.

DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.001C4.004


C4.008

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

sec.1a−−−− 7

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


CONNECTION OF 6 DOOR PHONES TO 1 DOOR UNITDoor phones A and B are called individually

while door phones C-D-E-F are called in parallel

SC101-1273A

(C4.004)

(C4.008)POWER SUPPLYFOR HOUSE

PHONE SYSTEM

A

B

C

D

E

F

PARALLEL CALLS

(C4.006)

6

1

9

2

10

CA

6

1

9

2

10

CA

G/T~0

~12

~0~12U1

U2U3

G/T

L

+

2-

1A

1

6

1

9

2

10

CA

6

1

9

2

10

CA

6

1

9

2

10

CA

6

1

9

2

10

CA

-J-6+6

~0

~12

~

~

PS

MAIN~

SINGLE CALLS

Name taglightingLock Release

ELECTRICLOCK

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

8 −−−− sec.1a

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


CONNECTION OF 6 DOOR PHONES TO 1 DOOR UNITDoor phones A and B are called individually while door phones C-D-E-F are called

in parallel. Floor call service with differentiated tone.Possibility of timing the door open

A

B

C

D

E

F

12

2

8

7

5

6

6

6

6

5

5

5

5

5

PARALLEL CALL

SINGLE CALLS

FUNCTION

By pressing U1 or U2 on the panel inside the building, a two-tone electronic call is sent to the speaker or door phone A or door phone B, respectively. By pressing U3 on the panel, door phones C-D-E-F are all called at the same time.Lift the handset of the called door phones to establish a conversation with the door unit.Each apartment is equipped with a fl oor call button which will operate the ringer with a differentiated call tone with respect to that of the door unit.Simply press the corresponding button to release the electrical door lock (operation can be timed).

EQUIPMENT







Sinthesi model N. 1 Button modules Ref. 1145/13N. 1 Module with door unit set-up Ref. 1145/20N. 1 Amplifi ed door unit Ref. 1145/500


or

K-Steel model N. 1 Button modules Ref. 1155/13AN. 1 Module with door unit Ref. 1155/20


or

725 model N. 1 Panel with 3 buttons Ref. 1155/13AN. 1 Amplifi ed door unit Ref. 1128/500

or

1128 model N. 1 Front case for door unit Ref. 1128/20-/21N. 1 Door unit Ref. 1128/500N. 3 Button Ref. 1128/1-/2N. 3 Blank module (*) Ref. 1128/30-/31



DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.001


C4.008VD.007

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

sec.1a−−−− 9

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


CONNECTION OF 6 DOOR PHONES TO 1 DOOR UNITDoor phones A and B are called individually while door phones C-D-E-F are called

in parallel. Floor call service with differentiated tone.Possibility of timing the door open

SC101-1284A

(C4.008)

(C4.006)

A

B

C

D

E

F

(VD.007)

(VD.007)

(VD.007)

(VD.007)

(VD.007)

(VD.007)

6

1

9

2

10

CA

6

1

9

2

10

CA

6

1

9

2

10

CA

6

1

9

2

10

CA

6

1

9

2

10

CA

+1

L1A2-

U2

G/T

U1

U3

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12

6

1

9

2

10

CA

-J-6+6

~0

~12

PS

~

~

SE1

AP

SE2

PS2

POWER SUPPLYFOR HOUSE

PHONE SYSTEM

PARALLEL CALLS

MAIN~

SINGLE CALLS

Name taglighting

Lock Release

ELECTRICLOCK

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

10 −−−− sec.1a

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 2 OUTDOOR STATIONSUse the relay box Ref. 788/51 and the power supply Ref. 786/11

5

5

4+(n-2)

4+(n-1)

4+n

7+n 7+n

2 2

FUNCTION

This type of installation solves the problem to connect a series of house phones of a building with 2 entrances each one equipped with a push button panel.This solution permits, by simply pushing a button from one of the 2 push button panels, to connect automatically the user to the calling push button panels unhooking the handset. This type of installation does not allow to talk from both outdoor stations simultaneously, since they work alternatively.

EQUIPMENT



N. X Door phone Mod. Utopia Grey colour Ref. 1134/1 orN. X Door phone Mod. Atlantico White colour Ref. 1133

POWER SUPPLY AND RELAY REFERENCES

N. 1 Power supply for door phone system 28VA Ref. 786/11N. 1 Relay box Ref. 788/51


Sinthesi modelN. X Button modules Ref. 1145/11-/12-/13-/14N. 2 Module with door unit set-up Ref. 1145/20-/21-/22N. 2 Amplifi ed door unit Ref. 1145/500


or



or



or



DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.001


C4.007 C4.008 C4.016VX.014

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

sec.1a−−−− 11

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 2 OUTDOOR STATIONSUse the relay box Ref. 788/51 and the power supply Ref. 786/11

SC101-1217C

(C4.006)

(C4.007)~ ~

(C4.007)(C4.008)

(C4.007)(C4.008)

(C4.006)

(VX.014)

~0~12

~

~

6

1

9

2

10

CA

L

+

2-

1A

1

U1G/T ~12

~0~12

G/T~0

U2

6

1

9

2

10

CA

G/T~0

~12

~0~12U2

U1G/T

U3U4

28

SN1

~0

7

1

15

13

1C 2C

14

SN2

9

3

5

6 4

1012

11 ~12

G/T~0~12

~0~12 U2

U1G/T

U3U4

L

+

2-

1A

1

U1G/T~12

~0~12

G/T~0

U2

~0-6 ~12+6PS


LockReleaseName tag

lighting

Name taglighting

MAIN ~

MAIN ~

ELECTRICLOCK

TO THE FOLLOWING DOOR PHONES



PHONE SYSTEM

LockRelease Name tag

lightingELECTRICLOCK

RELAY

LIGHT BULBTRANSFORMER

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

12 −−−− sec.1a

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONE TO 2 DOOR UNITSDifferentiated calls from door units.

Use the power supply wiht relay Ref. 786/15

4+n

5

4+(n-1)

5

4+(n-2)

22

7+n 7+n

FUNCTION

This type of system solves the problem of connecting a door phone column in a building with two entrances, each of which equipped with one panel and respective door unit.In this solution, a visitor can simply press a button on either of the two panels. The called door phone user can pick up the call and automatically connect to the calling panel. The other panel will be cut off.As a consequence, it is not possible in such as system to speak to two door units at the same time because either one or the other will be cut off.The user can recognise which door unit generated the call thanks to two different call tones.Simply press the corresponding button to release the electrical door lock of the door unit from where the call was generated.

EQUIPMENT





N. 1 Power supply for door phone system Ref. 786/15




or



or



or



DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.001


C4.007 C4.008 C4.016

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

sec.1a−−−− 13

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONE TO 2 DOOR UNITSDifferentiated calls from door units.

Use the power supply wiht relay Ref. 786/15

SC101-1280A

(C4.008)(C4.016)

(C4.006)

(C4.007)

(C4.006)

(C4.007)(C4.008)

(C4.016)

L

+

2

-

1A

1

U1G/T~12

~0~12

G/T~0

U2

6 3 9 ~~SN252 -J+-C2C1 4 SN11127 ~0PSPS2 8~

L

+

2

-

1A

1

U1G/T ~12

~0~12

G/T~0

U2

6

1

9

2

10

CA

G/T~0

~12

~0~12U2

U1G/T

U3U4

6

1

9

2

10

CA

G/T~0~12

~0~12 U2

U1G/T

U3U4


MAIN ~




PHONE SYSTEM

LockRelease

LockRelease

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

ELECTRICLOCK

ELECTRICLOCK

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

14 −−−− sec.1a

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 4 OUTDOOR STATIONS

4+n

5

4+(n-1)

5

4+(n-2)

22

7+n 7+n

22

7+n 7+n

FUNCTION

This installation allows connection of a series of door phone to 4 push button panels.By simply pushing a button on one of the 4 panels, the called door phone, picking up the handset, is automatically connected with the calling push button panel.It is not possible to talk from the outdoor stations simultaneously, since they work alternatively.

EQUIPMENT









or



or



or



DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.001


C4.007 C4.008 C4.016 VX.014

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

sec.1a−−−− 15

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS



SC101-1209C

(C4.006)(C4.006)

(C4.007)

(C4.006)(C4.006)

(C4.008)(C4.016)

(C4.007)(C4.008)(C4.016)

(C4.007)(C4.008)(C4.016)

(C4.007)(C4.008)(C4.016)

(VX.014)6

1

9

2

10

CA

IIIIII1

2

SN3

IIIAP

12

IIII

21

SN2

IIAP

III-

- II

1C 2C0-~ ~

21

IV12

IV

SN4

APIV

II12

SN1

API

- IV

I-

PA

~0~12

~

~

L

+

2-

1A

1

U1G/T ~12

~0~12

G/T~0

U2

G/T~0~12

~0~12 U2

U1G/T

U3U4

L

+

2-

1A

1

U1G/T~12

~0~12

G/T~0

U2

MAIN ~

G/T~0~12

~0~12 U2

U1G/T

U3U4

L

+

2-

1A

1

U1G/T~12

~0~12

G/T~0

U2

6

1

9

2

10

CA

~ ~ -6 PS~+6~ 120

G/T~0

~12

~0~12U2

U1G/T

U3U4

L

+

2-

1A

1

U1G/T ~12

~0~12

G/T~0

U2

G/T~0

~12

~0~12U2

U1G/T

U3U4

Name taglighting


MAIN ~


Name taglighting

ELECTRICLOCK


Name taglighting

ELECTRICLOCK

Lock Release


Name taglighting

ELECTRICLOCK

Lock Release

Lock Release


Name taglighting

ELECTRICLOCK

Lock Release

POWER SUPPLY FORDOOR PHONE SYSTEM

RELAYBOX


BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

16 −−−− sec.1a

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


CONNECTION OF SEVERAL COLUMNS OF DOOR PHONESTO 1 MAIN OUTDOOR STATION

Each column is also connected to its own secondary outdoor station.Use the relay box Ref. 788/51 and the power supply Ref. 786/11

K= quantity of columns

4+n 4+n

4+(n-1) 4+(n-1)

5 5

5 5

4+(n-2) 4+(n-2)

69+n 5+n 9+n5+n5+K+n

8+K+n+n...

2

2

2

FUNCTION

It is the ideal solution for residential centers where the single villas have to be connected to both their own outdoor stations and a common one at the main entrance. During the call the concerned door phone is automatically switched to the common outdoor station or to the one of the group it belongs to, by means of a switching relay.Services towards secondary outdoor stations are independent and can therefore take place at the same time.When the call comes from the common outdoor station, only the group the called door phone belongs to is switched to it, the others being able to carry on the normal service with their own secondary outdoor stations.

EQUIPMENT





N. 1 Power supply for door phone system 28VA Ref. 786/11N. K Relay box Ref. 788/51N. 1 Call repeater relay Ref. 788/52


Sinthesi modelN. X Button modules Ref. 1145/11-/12-/13-/14N. K+1 Module with door unit set-up Ref. 1145/20-/21-/22N. K+1 Amplifi ed door unit Ref. 1145/500


or

K-Steel model N. X Button modules Ref. 1155/11-/12A-/13A-/14AN. K+1 Module with door unit Ref. 1155/20-/21-/22A


or

725 model N. K+1 Panel with N buttons Mod. 725N. K+1 Amplifi ed door unit Ref. 1128/500


or

1128 model N. K+1 Front case for door unit Ref. 1128/20-/21N. K+1 Door unit Ref. 1128/500N. X Front case Ref. 1128/10-/11N. X Button Ref. 1128/1-/2


(K= quantity of columns)

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

sec.1a−−−− 17

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


CONNECTION OF SEVERAL COLUMNS OF DOOR PHONESTO 1 MAIN OUTDOOR STATION

Each column is also connected to its own secondary outdoor station.Use the relay box Ref. 788/51 and the power supply Ref. 786/11

SC101-1240A

(C4.017)(C4.008)(C4.007)

(C4.017)

(C4.006)

(C4.007)(C4.008)

-4

C1

SN1

6

1

7

7

-64

C1

1

SN1

6

1

9

2

10

CA

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12U3

U1

U4

U2

G/T

~~ PS ~6 120- +

6~

S2C6~0

~12S3S12CA

~ ~6 PS0

~612+ - ~

U4

U2

G/T

U1

U3

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12U3

U1

U4

U2

G/T

3

SN2

8 25

6

C2~

13

0~21

915

1

SN1

4

147C1

101112

U4

U2

G/T

U1

U3

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12

+1

L1A2-

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12U3

U1

U4

U2

G/T

U4

U2

G/T

U1

U3

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12U3

U1

U4

U2

G/T

6

1

9

2

10

CA

+1

L1A2-

U4

U2

G/T

U1

U3

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12



CONNECTIONAS 1ST GROUP

1ST COLUMN 2ND COLUMN

RELAYBOX

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

MAIN ~

MAIN ~


ELECTRIC LOCK

ELECTRICLOCK

LockRelease

LockRelease

Calls

Common

TO THE FOLLOWING

GROUP

RELAYBOX


DIAGRAM NOTES (see section 1)

C4.001


C4.007 C4.008 C4.017

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

18 −−−− sec.1a

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONE COLUMNS TO 1 MAIN DOOR UNIT Each column is connected to a secondary door unit. Differentiated calls from door

units. Use the power supply wiht relay Ref. 786/15


4+n 4+n

4+(n-1) 4+(n-1)

5 5

5 5

4+(n-2) 4+(n-2)

69+n 5+n 9+n5+n5+K+n

8+K+n+n...

2

2

2

FUNCTION

The system is useful in residential centres where individual houses or blocks need to be connected to their own door units and to a common door unit located at the main entrance. The concerned door phone is automatically switched onto the common door unit or onto the secondary door unit of the concerned group when called by means of a switching relay. Services to secondary door units are mutually interdependent and therefore may occur at the same time. When a call is made from the common door unit, only the group to which the called door phone belongs is switched. The other door phones can be continue to work with their own secondary units. The user can recognise calls from the main door unit or the secondary door unit thanks to two different call tones.

EQUIPMENT





N. K Column power supply Ref. 786/15N. 1 Power supply for door phone system 28VA Ref. 786/11N. 1 Call repeater relay Ref. 788/52




or:



or



or


For boards of accessories refer to “Wall Mounted PanelMod. 1128” section of Doorphone and Videodoorphone system product technical manual.

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

sec.1a−−−− 19

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONE COLUMNS TO ONE MAIN DOOR UNIT Each column is connected to a secondary door unit. Differentiated calls from door

units. Use the power supply wiht relay Ref. 786/15

SC101-1282A

1

SN1

CALLREPEATERRELAY

7

7

14-

-

POWER SUPPLYFOR DOOR PHONE SYSTEM

SN1

4

(C4.007)(C4.008)(C4.017)

(C4.017)(C4.008)

(C4.006)

COLUMNPOWER SUPPLY

(C4.007)

6

1

9

2

10

CA

S2C6~0

~12S3S12CA

~ ~-6 ~0~12 +6

3

SN2

8 25

6

9~12

1

SN1

4

7C1

+-

~0PS

C2

0 230PS2

U4

U2

G/T

U1

U3

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12

+1

L1A2-

U4

U2

G/T

U1

U3

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12U3

U1

U4

U2

G/T

U4

U2

G/T

U1

U3

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12U3

U1

U4

U2

G/T

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12U3

U1

U4

U2

G/T

6

1

9

2

10

CA

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12U3

U1

U4

U2

G/T

+1

L1A2-

U4

U2

G/T

U1

U3

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12




Name taglighting

Name taglighting

MAIN ~

MAIN ~

ELECTRICLOCK

ELECTRICLOCK

LockRelease

LockRelease


Loudspeakingunit

Loudspeakingunit

TO THE FOLLOWING

GROUP

Calls

Common

DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.001


C4.007 C4.008 C4.017

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

20 −−−− sec.1a

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES MODEL ATLANTICOTO 1 OUTDOOR STATIONS

Floor calls on the supplementary loudspeaker

TC

TC7

6+(n-2)

6+(n-1)

6+n

9+n

2

7

FUNCTION

Pressing one of the external panel buttons, the bitonal electronic call is sent to the correspondent door phone loudspeaker. When the called door phone handset is unhooked, contact is established and conversation may take place. To operate the electric lock it is suffi cient to press the proper push button.Floor calls can be differentiated from door unit calls by adding devices Ref. 787/1.The additional loudspeaker Ref. 9854/54 has more high call tone.This type of system can be made with Atlantico door phones only.

EQUIPMENT



N. X Door phone Mod. Atlantico Ref. 1133N. X Additional speaker Ref. 9854/54


N. 1 Power supply for door phone system 28VA Ref. 786/11N. 1 Tone generator Ref. 787/1




or



or



or



DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.001C4.004


C4.007 C4.008 VD.007 VX.006

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

sec.1a−−−− 21

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES MODEL ATLANTICOTO 1 OUTDOOR STATIONS

Floor calls on the supplementary loudspeaker

(C4.004)

(C4.006)

(VD.007)

(VX.006)

(VD.007)

(C4.007)(C4.008)

(VX.006)

6

1

9

2

10

CA

G/T~0

~12

~0~12U2

U1G/T

U3U4

~0

+6

PS

~12

-6

~

~

6

1

9

2

10

CA

PSSN

~12~0

L

+

2-

1A

1

U1G/T ~12

~0~12

G/T~0

U2


TONEGENERATOR

MAIN ~

ELECTRIC LOCK


Lock ReleaseName taglighting

SC101-1248A

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

22 −−−− sec.1a

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 1 OUTDOOR STATIONConnection of the sound generator to call door phones

from the fl oor using the same loudspeaker

TC

TC5

5+(n-2)

5+(n-1)

5+n

9+n

2

5

FUNCTION

When one of the keys of the push button panel located outside the building is pressed, the two-tone electronic call is sent to the loudspeaker of the matching door phone. When the handset of the door phone called is lifted, the contact between the outside and inside is established and the conversant can start.To activate the electric lock, press the matching key.Adding the Ref. 787/1 tone generator, it is possible to use the loudspeaker of the door phone for the call from the fl oor without having to add other buzzers. The call tone differs from that sent to the push button panel making it possible to identify the source.

EQUIPMENT

The following devices are needed for the system illustrated in diagram SC101-0252D:




N. 1 Power supply for door phone system 28VA Ref. 786/11N. 1 Tone generator Ref. 787/1




or



or



or



DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.001 C4.004 C4.006 C4.007 C4.008VD.007

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

sec.1a−−−− 23

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 1 OUTDOOR STATIONConnection of the sound generator to call door phones

from the fl oor using the same loudspeaker

SC101-0252D

(VD.007)

(VD.007)

(C4.004)

(C4.007)(C4.008)

(C4.006)

6~ ~ 12~ + -

6-J

~0 PS

G/T~0

~12

~0~12U2

U1G/T

U3U4

12~~

0 PS SN

6

1

9

2

10

CA

6

1

9

2

10

CA

L

+

2-

1A

1

U1G/T ~12

~0~12

G/T~0

U2



TONEGENERATOR

MAIN ~

ELECTRIC LOCK


Lock Release

Name taglighting

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

24 −−−− sec.1a

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 1 OUTDOOR STATIONSolution using the three-tone gong kit for differentiated call to the fl oor

The calls from the push button panel are sent with sound generatorThose to the fl oor with add-on device for call Ref. 1132/54

TC

TC7

6+(n-2)

6+(n-1)

6+n

9+n

2

7

FUNCTION

When one of the keys of the push button panel located outside the building is pressed, the two-tone electronic call is sent to the Loudspeaker of the matching door phone. When the handset of the door phone called is lifted, the contact between the outside and inside is established and the conversation can start. To activate the electric lock, press the matching key. Adding the three-tone Gong kit inside each door phone and an extra power supply, the call can be made to the fl oor differentiating this from those sent by the external push button panel. The Ref. 1132/54 makes it possible to transform the normal call signal into a three-toner Gong to be sent to the loudspeaker of the door phone. This device must be powered at 12Vdc; additional power unitRef. 1090/850 may be used. For this purpose, include one additional wire in the system for the “+” terminal and another additional wire to connect to the “PS” terminal of the door phone power unit cut by the fl oor call button.

EQUIPMENT

The following devices are needed for the system illustrated in diagram SC101-0791E:



N. X Add-on device for call Ref. 1132/54


N. 1 Power supply for door phone system 28VA Ref. 786/11N. 1 Additional power unit Ref. 1090/850




or



or


For the panels references and the accessories refer to “Panels with anodized aluminium front plate Mod. 725” section of Doorphone and Videodoorphone system - product technical manual.

or



DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.001 C4.004C4.006 C4.007C4.008 VX.006VD.007

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

sec.1a−−−− 25

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 1 OUTDOOR STATIONSolution using the three-tone gong kit for differentiated call to the fl oor

The calls from the push button panel are sent with sound generatorThose to the fl oor with add-on device for call Ref. 1132/54

SC101-0791E

(C4.004)

(VX.006) (VD.007)

(VD.007)(VX.006)

(C4.006)

CH2+

CH1

CA6

-J

-6+6

~0

~12

~

~

PS

CA

126

109

G/T~0

~12

~0~12U2

U1G/T

U3U4

L

+

2-

1A

1

U1G/T ~12

~0~12

G/T~0

U2

CH2+

CH1

CA6

P1

GND

P2

Vout

0

230

CA

126

109

ELECTRICLOCK

Lock Release

MAIN ~

MAIN ~

Name taglighting


ADDITIONALPOWER UNIT



BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

26 −−−− sec.1a

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 1 DOOR UNITSolution using additional differential fl oor call device Ref. 9854/53

TC

TC7

6+(n-2)

6+(n-1)

6+n

9+n

2

7

FUNCTION

When one of the keys of the push button panel located outside the building is pressed, the two-tone electronic call is sent to the Loudspeaker of the matching door phone. When the handset of the door phone called is lifted, the contact between the outside and inside is established and the conversation can start. To activate the electric lock, press the matching key. Floor calls can be differentiated from door unit calls by fi tting an additional device inside each door phone.The device must be powered either at 12Vdc or 12Vac. For powering the device at 12Vac, simply include one extra wire in the column connected to the door phone power unit terminal ~12. Use an additional dc power unit Ref. 1090/850 to power the device is powered at 12Vdc.

EQUIPMENT




N. X Add-on device for call Ref. 9854/53


N. 1 Power supply for door phone system 28VA Ref. 786/11N. 1 Additional power unit Ref. 1090/850




or



or



or



DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.001 C4.004C4.006 C4.007C4.008 VD.007VX.006

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

sec.1a−−−− 27

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 1 DOOR UNITSolution using additional differential fl oor call device Ref. 9854/53

(C4.004)

(C4.006)

(VX.006) (VD.007)

P1

GND

P2

Vout

0

230

-J

-6+6

~0

~12

~

~

PS

CHCP+CP-

CA

126

109

CA

126

109

G/T~0

~12

~0~12U2

U1G/T

U3U4

L

+

2-

1A

1

U1G/T ~12

~0~12

G/T~0

U2

ELECTRICLOCK

Lock Release

MAIN ~

MAIN ~

Name taglighting





SC101-1070C

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

28 −−−− sec.1a

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS



FUNCTION

This service is particularly required by professional offi ces, where a lot of people coming in and out obliges to often open the door without the use of the door phone to talk with the outside. Scheme SC101-0289 I shows the connection of one or more house phones suitable for this service in a normal outdoor system. The relay box Ref. 788/52 and the power supply Ref. 1090/850 have to be foreseen.With the switch in ON position, when the visitors calls the door phone buzzer doesn’t ring, but the relay starts and automatically opens the electric lock.The switch ON position is signaled on the door phone by GREEN LED lighting.

EQUIPMENT

The following devices are needed for the system illustrated in diagram SC101-0289 I:


N. X Door phone Mod. Atlantico White colour Ref. 1133

DOOR PHONE “A” REFERENCES

N. 1 Door phone Mod. Atlantico with 1 key Ref. 1133/1 + mute kit Ref. 1133/56


N. 1 Power supply for door phone system 28VA Ref. 786/11N. 1 Additional power unit Ref. 1090/850N. 1 Transformer Ref. 9000/230N. 1 Relay box Ref. 788/52




or



or



or



DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.001 C4.004C4.006 C4.007C4.008 VX.006

8

4+(n-1)

4+n

8+n

9+n

2

5

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

sec.1a−−−− 29

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS



SC101-0289 I

(C4.007)

(C4.004)

(C4.008)

(C4.006)

A

(VX.006)

G/T~0

~12

~0~12U2

U1G/T

U3U4

RzR+

10CA

AP

~ ~

~ ~

12 0

L

+

2-

1A

1

U1G/T ~12

~0~12

G/T~0

U2

-J

-6+6

~0

~12

~

~

PS

6

1

9

2

10

CA

6 CA S3S1

0 12~ ~

6

1

9

2

10

CA

P1 GNDP2 Vout0 230

ELECTRICLOCK

LockRelease

MAIN ~ MAIN ~

Name taglighting





TRANSFORMER RELAYBOX

MAIN ~

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

30 −−−− sec.1a

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 1 OUTDOOR STATIONDoor open light indicator.

Possibility of cutting out calls and respective indications

FUNCTION

Possibility of cut-off. (privacy on)With an installation as per Scheme SC101-1226B, operation will be the following:With the switch in OFF position the call sent from push button panel will reach the proper door phone loudspeaker; the GREEN LED is off. With the switch in ON position the door phone is cut-off and the GREEN LED is on (the circuit between RZ and R is closed).

Possibility of main door gate checkConnect as shown in diagram for providing open door signalling function. and to equip the door with the proper contact.With said installation the RED LED of all house phones will be on when the main door gate is open.

EQUIPMENT



DOOR PHONE “A” REFERENCESMax. 7 Door phone Mod. Atlantico with 2 LEDs 1 switch Ref. 1133/20

DOOR PHONE “B” REFERENCESMax. 7 Door phone Mod. Atlantico with 1 key Ref. 1133/1Max. 7 Mute kit + led Ref. 1133/56


N. 1 Power supply for door phone system 28VA Ref. 786/11N. 1 Additional power unit “A” Ref. 1090/850




or



or



or



DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.001 C4.004 C4.006C4.007 C4.008VX.006 VX.014

7

6+(n-1)

6+n

11+n

4

7A

B

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

sec.1a−−−− 31

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 1 OUTDOOR STATIONDoor open light indicator.

Possibility of cutting out calls and respective indications

SC101-1226B

(VX.014)

B

A

(VX.006)

(C4.004)

(C4.007)

(C4.006)

(C4.008)

6

CA

R

10

10

1

+AP

CA

9

2

Rz

P1

GND

P2

Vout

0

230 U2U3U4

U1

~12

~0~12

G/T~0

G/T

9

+

CA

AP

Rz

26

R

1

10

~12~0

G/T~0

~12

U2

G/TU1

L

+-

1A

12

~~

~

~

12

-J

-6+6

~0

~

~

PS

~12


MAIN~

MAIN~




ELECTRICLOCK

DOOR OPEN CONTACT

Lock Release

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

MAIN~


BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

32 −−−− sec.1a

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


INTERCOMMUNICATING CONNECTION OF 2 DOOR PHONES

1 2

6

4

6

FUNCTION

This installation allows communication between two separate places, such as: shop-warehouse, director’s offi ce - secretary’s offi ce, etc.The calling house phones handset must be unhooked and the hook lever pressed to the bottom in order to establish the connection with the called door phone. As soon as the called door phone handset is picked up, connection is made.

EQUIPMENT






DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.001

VX.021Cut or remove the jumpers on the device(s) 6 - 10.

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

sec.1a−−−− 33

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS



SC101-0249E

(VX.021)

(VX.021)

6

1

2

CA

910

6

1

2

CA

910


MAIN~

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

34 −−−− sec.1a

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS



4+n

4+n

4+n

4+n

4+n

4+n

4

FUNCTION

To communicate with any of the other house phones, the user must press the call key corresponding to the door phone required. On lifting the handset, the user called is automatically connected to the calling door phone.The service is not secret, i.e. if the user of a third door phone lifts the handset while other two are talking, the conversation can be heard.

EQUIPMENT



N. 4 Door phone Mod. Utopia Grey colour Ref. 1134/1N. 8 Additional buttons (packing of 8) Ref. 1134/55 orN. 4 Door phone Mod. Atlantico with 1 key Ref. 1133/1N. 8 Additional buttons (packing of 10) Ref. 1133/55



DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.001VX.006

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

sec.1a−−−− 35

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS



SC101-1272A

4

3

2

1

~0 12

~ ~J-+

6PS

6-

(VX.006)(C4.003)

(VX.006)(C4.003)

(VX.006)(C4.003)

(VX.006)(C4.003)

~

CA

1

26

T3

10

T2

9

G/T

G/T

G/T

T1

CA

1

26

T3

10

T2

9

G/T

G/T

G/T

T1

CA

1

26

T3

10

T2

9

G/T

G/T

G/T

T1

CA

1

26

T3

10

T2

9

G/T

G/T

G/T

T1

MAIN~


BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

36 −−−− sec.1a

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


INTERCOMMUNICATING CONNECTION OF MAXIMUM 13 DOOR PHONES

5+n

5+n

5+n

5+n

10+n

2

5+n

5+n

5+n

FUNCTION

This system is made of a main centralized door phone and of shunt phones. The main door phone can call and be called by the shunt phones.The shunt phones can only call the main phone but cannot call one another.In order to call a shunt phone, the main one must push the corresponding key; in order to call the main phone, the shunts must press the proper key.Using the Mod. Atlantico with 12 additional key, it is possible to call up to 13 shunt phones.

EQUIPMENT



N. 13 Door phone Mod. Atlantico with 12 additional key Ref. 1133/12



DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.001VX.006

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

sec.1a−−−− 37

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


INTERCOMMUNICATING CONNECTION OF MAXIMUM 13 DOOR PHONES

SC101-0861D

(VX.008)

0~ -J 6+PS

18~ ~ ~12~-

6

CA

1

26109

U2

U6

U4

U3

U5

U1G/T

U8U9

U11U10

U7

U12

-/~+/~

CA

1

26109

U2

U6

U4

U3

U5

U1G/T

U8U9

U11U10

U7

U12

-/~+/~

CA

1

26109

U2

U6

U4

U3

U5

U1G/T

U8U9

U11U10

U7

U12

-/~+/~


MAIN~


BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

38 −−−− sec.1a

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


CONNECTION OF 1 MAIN DOOR PHONE TO 12 SHUNT DOOR PHONES MAXIMUM

6

5+(n-2)

6

5+(n-1)

5+n

4

5+n

FUNCTION

This system is made of a main centralized door phone and of shunt phones. The main door phone can call and be called by the shunt phones.The shunt phones can only call the main phone but cannot call one another.In order to call a shunt phone, the main one must push the corresponding key; in order to call the main phone, the shunts must press the proper key.Using the Mod. Atlantico Atlantico with 12 additional key, it is possible to call up to 12 shunt phones.

EQUIPMENT



MAIN DOOR PHONE REFERENCESN. 1 Door phone Mod. Atlantico with 12 additional key Ref. 1133/12

SHUNT DOOR PHONES REFERENCESN. 7 Door phone Mod. Atlantico Ref. 1133



DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.001VX.006

VX.021Cut or remove the jumpers on the device(s) 6 - 10.

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

sec.1a−−−− 39

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


CONNECTION OF 1 MAIN DOOR PHONE TO 12 SHUNT DOOR PHONES MAXIMUM

SC101-0863E

0~ -J 6+PS ~ ~-

618~12~

Mod. Atlantico

CA

1

26109

CA

1

26109

U2

U6

U4

U3

U5

U1G/T

U8U9

U11U10

U7

U12

-/~+/~

CA

1

26109

MAIN DOOR PHONE

SHUNT DOOR PHONES

MAIN~


(VX.021)

(VX.021)

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

40 −−−− sec.1a

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


INTERCOMMUNICATING CONNECTION OF 2 DOOR PHONESWITH THE POSSIBILITY OF REPLY TO 1 OUTDOOR STATION

Single calls from outdoor station

8

8

7

12

2

FUNCTION

The house phones carry out the intercom service and can, at the same times, reply to external calls.Switching from one service to another is automatic and takes place during the call by means of a reply incorporated in the power supply.When the intercom service is active, nothing can be heard on the outdoor station and vice versa.Calls from the door unit are sent to the door phone speaker while calls from the other door phone are sent to the additional electronic buzzer.

EQUIPMENT



N. 2 Door phone Mod. Utopia with 1 key Ref. 1134/1 orN. 2 Door phone Mod. Atlantico with 1 key Ref. 1133/1

N. 2 Diodes (packing of 10) Ref. 1131/4




Sinthesi model N. 1 Module with door unit set-up Ref. 1145/22N. 1 Amplifi ed door unit Ref. 1145/500


or

K-Steel model N. 1 Module with door unit Ref. 1155/22A


or

725 model N. 1 Panel with 2 buttons Ref. 725/102N. 1 Amplifi ed door unit Ref. 1128/500

For the accessories refer to “Panels with anodized aluminium front plate Mod. 725” section of Doorphone and Videodoorphone system - product technical manual.

or

1128 model N. 1 Front case for door unit Ref. 1128/20-/21N. 1 Door unit Ref. 1128/500N. 2 Button Ref. 1128/1-/2N. X Blank module Ref. 1128/30-/31


DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.001 C4.004


C4.014 VX.006

VX.021Cut or remove the jumpers on the device(s): 6 - 10.

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

sec.1a−−−− 41

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS




SC101-1243B

(C4.004)

(C4.006)

(C4.003)(VX.006)(VX.021)(C4.014)

9 3 SN260~ 8 SN152-1 ~ ~+C2C1 PSPS2 4-

J7 ~12

T1G/T

6

12

CA

109

L

+

2-

1A

1

U1G/T~12

~0~12

G/T~0

U2

T1G/T

6

12

CA

109

MAIN~

ELECTRICLOCK

Name taglighting


Lock Release

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

42 −−−− sec.1a

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS



Parallel calls from outdoor station Differentiated calls

8

8

6

11

2

FUNCTION

The house phones carry out the intercom service and can, at the same times, reply to calls external calls.Switching from one service to another is automatic and takes place during the call by means of a reply incorporated in the power supply.When the intercom service is active, nothing can be heard on the outdoor station and vice versa.From the push button panel, all the house phones are called in parallel with a single call key.Door phone calls ring the supplementary buzzer.

EQUIPMENT

The following devices are needed for the system illustrated in diagram SC101-0578G:



N. 2 Diodes (packing of 10) Ref. 1131/4N. 2 Extra electronic buzzers Ref. 9854/52


N. 1 Power supply for door phone system with relay Ref. 786/15




or

K-Steel model N. 1 Module with door unit Ref. 1155/21


or

725 model N. 1 Panel with 1 button Ref. 725/101N. 1 Amplifi ed door unit Ref. 1128/500


or



DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.001C4.004C4.014VX.006

VX.021Cut or remove the jumpers on the device(s): 6 – 10.

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

sec.1a−−−− 43

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS



Parallel calls from outdoor station Differentiated calls

SC101-0578G

(C4.004)

(C4.014)

(VX.006)(VX.021)

(C4.014)(VX.021)(VX.006)

BUZZER -/~+/~

T1G/T

6

12

CA

109

BUZZER -/~+/~

9 3 SN16 ~0 8SN2 5-1 ~ ~+C1C2 PS 4-J~12 2

T1G/T

6

12

CA

109

L

+

2-

1A

1

U1G/T~12

~0~12

G/T~0

ELECTRICLOCK

LockRelease

Name taglighting

MAIN~

DOOR PHONEPOWER SUPPLY

WITH RELAY BOX

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

44 −−−− sec.1a

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


INTERCOMMUNICATING CONNECTION OF MAXIMUM 13 DOOR PHONESWITH THE POSSIBILITY OF REPLY TO 1 OUTDOOR STATION

Single calls from outdoor stationDifferentiated calls

5+n

5+n

5+n

5+n

10+n

2

5+n

5+n

5+n

FUNCTION

The house phones carry out the intercom service and can, at the same times, reply to external calls.Switching from one service to another is automatic and takes place during the call by means of a reply incorporated in the power supply.When the intercom service is active, nothing can be heard on the outdoor station and vice versa.The various device may be called individually from the panel.Using the Mod. Atlantico with 12 additional key, it is possible to call up to 13 shunt phones.

EQUIPMENT



N. 13 Door phone Mod. Atlantico with 12 additional key “A” Ref. 1133/12N. X Diodes (packing of 10) Ref. 1131/4






or



or



or



DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.001 C4.004 C4.014 VX.006

VX.021Cut or remove the jumpers on the device(s): 6 – 10 (P1).

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

sec.1a−−−− 45

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


INTERCOMMUNICATING CONNECTION OF MAXIMUM 13 DOOR PHONESWITH THE POSSIBILITY OF REPLY TO 1 OUTDOOR STATION

Single calls from outdoor stationDifferentiated calls

SC101-0839D

(C4.004)

(C4.006)

(C4.007)(C4.008)

P1

P1

P1

(VX.021)(C4.014)

(VX.021)(C4.014)

(VX.021)(C4.014)

AI MODULISUCCESSIVI


L

+

2-

1A

1

U1G/T~12

~0~12

G/T~0

U2

CA

1

26

109

U2

U6

U4

U3

U5

U1G/T

U8U9

U11U10

U7

U12

-/~+/~

CA

1

26

109

U2

U6

U4

U3

U5

U1G/T

U8U9

U11U10

U7

U12

-/~+/~

CA

1

26

109

U2

U6

U4

U3

U5

U1G/T

U8U9

U11U10

U7

U12

-/~+/~

G/T~0~12

~0~12 U2

U1G/T

U3U4

9 3 SN16 0~ 8SN2 52-1 ~ ~+C2C1 PSPS2 4-J7 ~12

ELECTRICLOCK

Lock Release

MAIN~

DOOR PHONEPOWER SUPPLYWITH RELAY

Name taglighting

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

46 −−−− sec.1a

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS




8

8

7

212 12

2

FUNCTION

The house phones carry out the intercom service and can, at the same times, reply to calls from the external push-button panel. Switching from one service to another is automatic and takes place during the call by means of a reply incorporated in the power supply and a separate switching relay.When the intercom service is active, nothing can be heard on the outdoor station and vice versa.

EQUIPMENT






N. 1 Power supply for door phone system Ref. 786/15N. 1 Relay box Ref. 788/51




or

K-Steel model N. 2 Module with door unit Ref. 1155/22A


or

725 model N. 2 Panel with 2 buttons Ref. 725/102N. 2 Amplifi ed door unit Ref. 1128/500


or



DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.001


C4.014 C4.016 VX.006 VX.014


BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

sec.1a−−−− 47

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS




SC101-1249A

(VX.006)(VX.021)

(C4.016) (C4.016)


(VX.014)

(C4.006)(C4.006)

RELAY BOX

(C4.014)

(VX.021)(VX.006)

(C4.014)

L

+

2-

1A

1

U1G/T~12

~0~12

G/T~0

U2

T1G/T

6

12

CA

109

T1G/T

6

12

CA

109

SN1

7

101

4

~0~12

8

SN2

9

3

6

12

11C1

C213

1514

25

~12~0~ ~

+36SN2 C1~12 ~0 1 -JC2PS SN18 2 5-~~ PS2947

L

+

2-

1A

1

U1G/T ~12

~0~12

G/T~0

U2

MAIN~

MAIN~

ELECTRICLOCK

ELECTRICLOCK

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

Name taglighting


WITH RELAY BOX

LockRelease

LockRelease

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

48 −−−− sec.1a

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS



Parallel calls from outdoor station

8

8

8

6

211 11

2

FUNCTION

The house phones carry out the intercom service and can, at the same times, reply to calls from the external push-button panel. Switching from one service to another is automatic and takes place during the call by means of a reply incorporated in the power supply and a separate switching relay.When the intercom service is active, nothing can be heard on the outdoor station and vice versa.From the push button panel, all the house phones are called in parallel with a single call key.

EQUIPMENT






N. 1 Power supply for door phone system with relay Ref. 786/15N. 1 Relay box Ref. 788/51




or



or



or



BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

sec.1a−−−− 49

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS



Parallel calls from outdoor station

SC101-1244A

(C4.006)

(C4.016)(C4.016)

(C4.006)

(VX.006)(VX.021)

2

1

(VX.006)(VX.021)

(C4.014)

(C4.014) (VX.014)

T1G/T

6

12

CA

109

-/~+/~

T1G/T

6

12

CA

109

-/~+/~

SN1

7

101

4

~0~12

8

SN2

9

3

6

12

11C1

C213

1514

25

L

+

2-

1A

1

U1G/T~12

~0~12

G/T~0

~12~0~ ~

L

+

2-

1A

1

U1G/T ~12

~0~12

G/T~0

+36SN2C1~12 ~0 1 -JC2PS SN18 2 5-~~ PS294 7


ELECTRICLOCK

ELECTRICLOCK

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

Lock ReleaseLock Release

MAIN~

MAIN~

DOOR PHONEPOWER SUPPLYWITH RELAY

RELAYBOX

DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)C4.001


C4.014 C4.016 VX.006 VX.014


BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

50 −−−− sec.1a

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


INTERCOMMUNICATING CONNECTION OF MAXIMUM 13 DOOR PHONESWITH THE POSSIBILITY OF REPLY TO 2 OUTDOOR STATIONS

Single calls from the push button panels

6+(n-2)

6+(n-1)

5+n

6+n

6+n

7+n 7+n

22

FUNCTION

The house phones carry out the intercom service and can, at the same times, reply to calls from 2 external push button panels.Switching from one service to another is automatic and takes place during the call by means of a separate switching relay. When the intercom service is active, nothing can be heard on the outdoor station and vice versa.Using the Mod. Atlantico with 12 additional key, it is possible to call up to 13 shunt phones.

EQUIPMENT



N. 13 Door phone Mod. Atlantico with 12 additional key “A” Ref. 1133/12






or



or



or



DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.001C4.014VX.006


BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

sec.1a−−−− 51

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS



Single calls from the push button panels

SC101-0844E

(VX.021)(C4.014)

P1

P1


TO THE FOLLOWINGMODULES


(C4.007)(C4.008)

(C4.006)(C4.006)

(C4.007)(C4.008)

G/T~0~12

~0~12U2

U1G/T

U3U4

U1G/T ~12

~0~12

G/T~0

U2

-

2+

1A

1

L

CA

1

26

109

U2

U6

U4

U3

U5

U1G/T

U8U9

U11U10

U7

U12

-/~

+/~

CA

1

26

109

U2

U6

U4

U3

U5

U1G/T

U8U9

U11U10

U7

U12

-/~

+/~

G/T~0~12

~0~12 U2

U1G/T

U3U4

U1G/T~12

~0~12

G/T~0

U2

-

2+

1A

1

L

MAIN~


ELECTRICLOCK

ELECTRICLOCK

LockRelease

LockRelease

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

RELAYBOX

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

52 −−−− sec.1a

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS



Parallel calls from the push button panels

6+n

6+n

6

6+n

6+n

6+n

6+n

2 2

8 8

FUNCTION

The house phones carry out the intercom service and can, at the same times, reply to calls from 2 external push button panels.Switching from one service to another is automatic and takes place during the call by means of a separate switching relay. When the intercom service is active, nothing can be heard on the outdoor station and vice versa.From the push button panel, all the house phones are called in parallel with a single call key.Using the Mod. Atlantico with 12 additional key, it is possible to call up to 13 shunt phones.

EQUIPMENT

The following devices are needed for the system illustrated in diagram SC101-0866G:


DOOR PHONE “A”N. 13 Door phone Mod. Atlantico with 12 additional key Ref. 1133/12






or



or



or



DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.001C4.014VX.006


BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

sec.1a−−−− 53

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


SC101-0866G

P1

P1

(VX.021)(C4.014)

(VX.021)(C4.014)

CA

1

26

109

U2

U6

U4

U3

U5

U1G/T

U8U9

U11U10

U7

U12

-/~

+/~

U1G/T ~12

~0~12

G/T~0

2+

1AL

1-

U1G/T~12

~0~12

G/T~0

2+

1AL

1-

CA

1

26

109

U2

U6

U4

U3

U5

U1G/T

U8U9

U11U10

U7

U12

-/~

+/~

MAIN~


LockRelease

LockRelease

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

RELAYBOX


Parallel calls from the push button panels

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

54 −−−− sec.1a

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


CONNECTION OF TWO INTERCOMMUNICATING DOOR PHONE EXTENSIONSTO A SYSTEM WITH DOOR UNIT

Parallel calls from door unitDifferentiated calls

8

8

5

6

FROM RISINGCOLUMN

FUNCTION

The connection example shown in the following diagram offers the possibility of adding intercom door phones in the same apartment to an existing system with door unit.The house phones carry out the intercom service and can, at the same times, reply to calls external calls.Switching from one service to another is automatic and takes place during the call by means of a reply incorporated in the power supply.When the intercom service is active, nothing can be heard on the outdoor station and vice versa.The door unit call is sent to the supplementary electronic buzzer.The call between two door phones is sent to the speaker of both door phones.

EQUIPMENT






N. 1 Power supply for door phone system with relay Ref. 786/11N. 1 Relay box “A” Ref. 788/52N. 1 Relay box “B” Ref. 788/51

DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.001C4.014VX.006


BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

sec.1a−−−− 55

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


SC101-0567E

CONNECTION OF TWO INTERCOMMUNICATING DOOR PHONE EXTENSIONSTO A SYSTEM WITH DOOR UNIT

Parallel calls from door unitDifferentiated calls

-/~+/~

-/~+/~

(VX.006)(VX.021)

(C4.014)

(C4.014)

(VX.021)

CALL

473W

POWER SUPPLY

MAIN~

FROMRISINGCOLUMN

RELAYBOX “A”

RELAYBOX “B”

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

56 −−−− sec.1a

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS



4+(n-2)

4+(n-1)

4+n

9+n

2

5

5

FUNCTION

To assure the secrecy of conversation to all the house phones of the door phone system, a device (Ref. 1131/5 for Scaitel door phones or Ref. 1134/5 for Utopia door phones) shall be inserted in each door phone and a switch-off device Ref. 5330/60 in the push button panel.So, all the house phones will be cut off from any conversation (nothing can be heard when unhooking the handset); only the called door phone can start a conversation with the caller, no other being able to intercept the call. The door phone is activated to communicate from the call up to the following call. If it is not direct to the same set the call release the door phone from the connection with the loudspeaking unit. The secrecy device offers two possibilities of electric lock opening:• NORMAL OPENING (solution A): which takes place each time the

hook lever of any door phone is pressed to the bottom;• ACTIVATED OPENING (solution B): the electric lock can be

activated only after a call, and only from the called door phone (in this case, remove the jumper from the door phone printed circuit).

EQUIPMENT



N. X Door phone Mod. Utopia Grey colour Ref. 1134/1N. X Secrecy device Ref. 1131/5




Sinthesi model N. X Button modules Ref. 1145/11-/12-/13-/14N. 1 Module with door unit set-up Ref. 1145/20-/21-/22N. 1 Door unit Ref. 1145/500N. 1 Switch off privacy device Ref. 5330/60


or

K-Steel model N. X Button modules Ref. 1155/11-/12A-/13A-/14AN. 1 Module with door unit Ref. 1155/20-/21-/22AN. 1 Switch off privacy device Ref. 1155/75


or

725 model N. 1 Panel with N buttons Mod. 725N. 1 Amplifi ed door unit Ref. 1128/500N. 1 Switch off privacy device Ref. 5330/60


DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.001 C4.007 C4.008VX.006 VX.013

VX.021Cut or remove the jumpers on the device(s) (solution B only):P1 (Utopia)

VX.028

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

sec.1a−−−− 57

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS



SC101-1134E

(C4.007)(C4.008)

(VX.021)(VX.006)

(VX.006)

(VX.006)

1

9

2

10

CA

6

G/T~0

~12

~0~12U2

U1G/T

U3U4

U1G/T ~12

~0~12

G/T~0

U2

21A

L

+-

1

-6+6

~0

~18~12

-JPS

~

~

SN

1A2A

AP

2B

-/~

1B

9

PS

~12

1

9

2

10

CA

6

1

9

2

10

CA

6

1

9

2

10

CA

6



SOLUTION A SOLUTION B

ELECTRIC LOCK


Lock Release

SWITCH OFFPRIVACY DEVICE

Name taglighting

MAIN~

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

58 −−−− sec.1a

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS



5

5

4+(n-1)

4+n

4+(n-2)

11+n

2

2

FUNCTION

Pressing one of the external panel buttons, the bitonal electronic call is sent to the correspondent door phone loudspeaker. When the called door phone handset is unhooked, contact is established and conversation may take place. Simply press the corresponding button to release the two electrical door locks.

EQUIPMENT





N. 1 Power supply for door phone system 28VA Ref. 786/11N. 1 Relay box “A” Ref. 788/52N. 1 Transformer 12Vac 30VA NNF




or



or



or



NNF= not supplied by us.

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

sec.1a−−−− 59

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS



SC101-0482D

(C4.006 )

(C4.007 )(C4.008 )

TRANSFORMER12Vac - 30VA

N.N.F.

6

1

9

2

10

CA

S1

~122

S6

S3S4

~

~

~0~12

G/T~0

~12

~0~12U2

U1G/T

U3U4

L

+

2-

1A

1

U1G/T ~12

~0~12

G/T~0

U2

-J

-6+6

~0

~12

~

~

PS

6

1

9

2

10

CA

Name taglighting



PHONE SYSTEM

Lock Release

Lock Release

MAIN~

MAIN~


ELECTRICLOCK 1

ELECTRICLOCK 2

RELAYBOX

DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.001 C4.004


C4.007 C4.008

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

60 −−−− sec.1a

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


CONNECTION OF TWO INTERCOM DOOR PHONES WITH POSSIBILITY OF ANSWERING CALLS FROM ONE SECONDARY DOOR UNIT EXTENSION OF AN

ELECTRICAL DOOR UNIT SYSTEMParallel calls from outdoor station

Differentiated calls

FUNCTION

The door phones have intercom features and may at the same time take calls from both the secondary panel and door phone system to which they are connected.Switching from one service to another is automatic and takes place during the call by means of reply.When the intercom service is active, nothing can be heard on the outdoor station and vice versa.La chiamata tra i citofoni è inviata all’altoparlante dei citofoni.La chiamata dal portiere elettrico è inviata sul ronzatore elettronico supplementare (Buzzer) di entrambe i citofoni.

EQUIPMENT






N. 1 Power supply for door phone system with relay Ref. 786/11N. 1 Relay box “1” Ref. 788/58N. 1 Relay box “2” Ref. 788/52




or



or



or



DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.001C4.004C4.014VX.006


8

8

6

6

11

2

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

sec.1a−−−− 61

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


CONNECTION OF TWO INTERCOM DOOR PHONES WITH POSSIBILITY OF ANSWERING CALLS FROM ONE SECONDARY DOOR UNIT EXTENSION OF AN

ELECTRICAL DOOR UNIT SYSTEMParallel calls from outdoor station

Differentiated calls

SC101-0735D

-/~+/~

-/~+/~

(VX.006)(VX.021)

(VX.006)(VX.021)

(C4.014)

(C4.006)

(C4.014)

L

+

2-

1A

1

U1G/T ~12

~0~12

G/T~0

POWER SUPPLY

MAIN~

ELECTRICLOCK

Lock Release

Name taglighting

FROM RISINGCOLUMN

call

RELAY BOX(1)

RELAY BOX(2)

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

62 −−−− sec.1a

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


sec.1b−−−− 1

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


BASIC DIAGRAMS FOR1+1 WIRE ELECTRONICDOOR PHONE SYSTEMS

SECTION 1B(REV.D)


I −−−− sec.1b

SECTION 1B CONTENTS


DO

OR

PH

ON

E A

ND

VID

EO

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

M -

DIA

GR

AM

- S

ectio

n 1B


Diagram Sec. Pag.BASIC DIAGRAMS FOR 1+1 WIRE ELECTRONIC DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 1 OUTDOOR STATIONWITH SECRECY OF CONVERSATION(Panels Mod. Sinthesi or K-Steel) ................................................................................................................. SC101-1135F ...............1b ................2

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 1 OUTDOOR STATIONWITH SECRECY OF CONVERSATION(Panels Mod. 725 or Mod. Domus Aura) .......................................................................................................SC101-0932C ...............1b ................4

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 2 OUTDOOR STATIONSWITH SECRECY OF CONVERSATION(Panels Mod. Sinthesi or K-Steel) ................................................................................................................. SC101-1210B ...............1b ................6

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO TWO OUTDOOR STATIONSWITH SECRECY OF CONVERSATION(Panels Mod. 725 or Mod. Domus Aura) ....................................................................................................... SC101-0937B ...............1b ................8

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO FOUR OUTDOOR STATIONSWITH SECRECY OF CONVERSATION(Panels Mod. Sinthesi or K-Steel) .................................................................................................................SC101-1218C ...............1b ............. 10

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL COLUMN OF DOOR PHONES TO COMMON OUTDOOR STATIONSEach group in also connected to its own secondary outdoor station(Panels Mod. Sinthesi or K-Steel) ................................................................................................................. SC101-1241B ...............1b ............. 12

CONNECTION OF 1 DOOR PHONES TO 1 OUTDOOR STATIONDoor phone can open door during call from panel ...........................................................................................SC101-1327 ...............1b ............. 14

RELEASE OF TWO ELECTRICAL LOCKS AT THE SAME TIMEa) 725 or Domus Aura door unit b) Sinthesi or K-Steel door unit...................................................................................................................... SC101-1269A ...............1b ............. 16

sec.1b −−−− II

SECTION 1B CONTENTS


DO

OR

PH

ON

E A

ND

VID

EO

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

M -

DIA

GR

AM

- S

ectio

n 1B


1 + 1 DOOR PHONE SYSTEM DIAGRAM CROSS-REFERENCE TABLE


Panel model



Connection of a supplementary electrical lock

Possibility of opening door while calling from the panel


CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 1 OUTDOOR STATION WITH SECRECYOF CONVERSATION 2

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL COLUMN OF DOOR PHONES TO COMMON OUTDOOR STATIONSEach group in also connected to its own secondary outdoor station 12

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 2 OUTDOOR STATIONS WITH SECRECYOF CONVERSATION 6

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO FOUR OUTDOOR STATIONS WITH SECRECYOF CONVERSATION 10

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 1 OUTDOOR STATION WITH SECRECYOF CONVERSATION 4

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO TWO OUTDOOR STATIONS WITH SECRECYOF CONVERSATION 8

RELEASE OF TWO ELECTRICAL LOCKS AT THE SAME TIMEa) 725 or Domus Aura door unit b) Sinthesi or K-Steel door unit 16

CONNECTION OF 1 DOOR PHONES TO 1 OUTDOOR STATIONDoor phone can open door during call from panel

DIAGRAM

SC101-1135F

SC101-1241B

SC101-1210B

SC101-1218C

SC101-0932C

SC101-0937B

SC101-1269A

SC101-1327 14

Sinthesior

K-Steel

725 orDomus Aura

Generic


1

1

2

4

0

K

0

0

1

2

0

0

√-- --

√-- --

2 −−−− sec.1b

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 1 OUTDOOR STATIONWITH SECRECY OF CONVERSATION

(Panels Mod. Sinthesi or K-Steel)

1+(n-2)

1+(n-1)

1+n

1+n

2

2

2

2

FUNCTION

1+1 wire system allows to obtain the service of a standard outdoor set installation with conversation, call, electric lock opening, with only 2 wires in the rising column: 1 common + 1 single for each door phone.The outdoor set is fed, with two wires only, by a 12V a.c. voltage transformer. To assure secrecy to all the door phones, special devices for secrecy of conversation are inserted into the push button panel (one for each key).So, all the door phones will be cut off from any conversation (nothing can be heard when picking up the handset); only the called door phone can start a conversation with the caller, no other being able to intercept the call. The called house is qualifi ed to talk until another call is made from the push button panel to other door phone.The electric lock opening depends from the circuit of secrecy of conversation (the lock cannot be operated unless the door phone has been called).

EQUIPMENT

The following devices are needed for the system illustrated in diagram SC101-1135F:


N. X Door phones Mod. Utopia Ref. 1134/35 orN. X Door phones Mod. Atlantico Ref. 1133/35A

POWER SUPPLY REFERENCES

N. 1 Transformer Ref. 9000/230


Sinthesi modelN. X Button modules Ref. 1145/11-/12-/13-/14N. 1 Module with door unit set-up Ref. 1145/20-/21N. 1 Amplifi ed door unit Ref. 1145/67N. X/4 Conversation privacy device Ref. 1145/74


or

K-Steel modelN. X Button modules Ref. 1155/11-/12A-/13A-/14AN. 1 Module with door unit Ref. 1155/30-/31-/32AN. X/4 Conversation privacy device Ref. 1145/74


DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C1.002

C4.006Sinthesi models only:Connect jumper C1 with U1.

C4.007C4.008VX.006VX.014

sec.1b−−−− 3

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S



(VX.014)

(C4.008)

Amplifiedloudspeakingunit

(C4.007)

(VX.006)

(C4.006)G/T

C2

1

4

U1

2

F

~

PS

1/~

C1

SN3

5~0

G/T

~12

~12~0

CA1

2

1

CA1

2

1

~0~12

~

~

~0~12

~

~

~0~12G/T

G/T~0

~12

1 4

1

C2

4

C1

U3U4

U1

C3U2

C4

COLUMN

BUTTON MODULE

To the followingmodule

To the followingconversation

privacydevice

CONVERSATIONPRIVACYDEVICE

TRANSFORMER

Lock Release

MAIN~

MAIN~

ELECTRICLOCK

Name taglighting

Name taglighting



SC101-1135F

4 −−−− sec.1b

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


FUNCTION

1+1 wire system allows to obtain the service of a standard outdoor set installation with conversation, call, electric lock opening, with only 2 wires in the rising column: 1 common + 1 single for each door phone.The outdoor set is fed, with two wires only, by a 12V a.c. voltage transformer. To assure secrecy to all the door phones, special devices for secrecy of conversation are inserted into the push button panel (one for each key).So, all the door phones will be cut off from any conversation (nothing can be heard when picking up the handset); only the called door phone can start a conversation with the caller, no other being able to intercept the call. The called house is qualifi ed to talk until another call is made from the push button panel to other door phone.The electric lock opening depends from the circuit of secrecy of conversation (the lock cannot be operated unless the door phone has been called).

EQUIPMENT





N. 1 Transformer Ref. 9000/230


725 modelN. 1 Panel with N buttons Mod. 725N. 1 Amplifi ed door unit Ref. 1035/67N. X/4 Conversation privacy device Ref. 1035/25


or

Domus Aura model N. 1 Panel with N buttons Mod. 1110N. 1 Amplifi ed door unit Ref. 1035/67N. X/4 Conversation privacy device Ref. 1110/74

For the panels references and the accessories refer to “Panels Domus Aura” section of Doorphone and Videodoorphone system - product technical manual.

DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C1.002VX.006VX.014

1+(n-2)

1+(n-1)

1+n

1+n

2

2

2

2


(Panels Mod. 725 or Mod. Domus Aura)

sec.1b−−−− 5

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S




SC101-0932C

(VX.006)

(VX.014)

(C1.002)

COLUMN

CA1

2

1

~

~

~0~12

~

~

~0~12

4 41 14114

PS4

5

SN

~2

3

1/~

CA1

2

1

MAIN ~

MAIN ~

TRANSFORMER

ELECTRIC LOCK

Lock Release

Name taglighting

Name taglighting


PANEL FOR AMPLIFIEDLOUDSPEAKING UNIT

CONVERSATIONPRIVACY DEVICE

6 −−−− sec.1b

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 2 OUTDOOR STATIONSWITH SECRECY OF CONVERSATION


1+(n-2)

1+(n-1)

1+n

7+n6+n

2 2

2

2

FUNCTION

The 1+1 wire door phone system makes it possible to set up systems in which a door phone riser is to be connected to two entrances each with 1 push button panel with related loudspeaking unit.Adding a specifi c relay device, a person can press a key of one of the two push button panels so that the user of the door phone called, on lifting the handset, is automatically connected with the calling push button panel excluding the other service.Therefore in this system, it is not possible to speak from two outdoor stations at the same time in that functioning of these is alternative.to guarantee secrecy of conversation of all the door phones in the system, the specifi c secrecy circuits (one for each button) are inserted inside only one of the two push button panels. Release of the electric lock is also enabled by the secrecy circuit. This means that a user cannot release the lock unless he/she has been called and can open only the lock corresponding to the push button panel from which the call has been made.

EQUIPMENT





N. 2 Transformer Ref. 9000/230N. 1 Relay box Ref. 788/51




or



DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C1.002


C4.007C4.008VX.006VX.014

VX.021Cut or remove the jumpers on the device(s):a) PS – G/Tb) 4 – F

sec.1b−−−− 7

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 2 OUTDOOR STATIONSWITH SECRECY OF CONVERSATION


SC101-1210B

(C4.007)

(C4.006)

(C4.008)

(VX.021)

(C4.008)

(C4.006)(VX.021)

(C4.007)

(VX.006)

N.2 TRANSFORMER

LIGHT BULB

(VX.014)

TRANSFORMER

AB

CA1

1

2

CA1

1

2

1110C2 C1

~12~0

3813

1

SN1SN2

25

157

1214

6 4

9

~12 ~0~ ~

~12 ~0~ ~

~12~0 ~~

3

C1

2

PS

1/~1

~

4

C2

U1

F

5

SN

G/TG/T

~12

~0~12~0

U3U2

~0~12G/T

G/TU1

U4

~0~12

3

C1

2

PS

1/~1

~

4

C2

U1

F

5

SN

G/T G/T

~12

~0~12~0

1 4

1

C2

4

C1

C3C4 ~12

G/T

G/T~0

~12~0U3

U2

U4

U1

COLUMN

MAIN ~

MAIN ~ MAIN ~

To nextconversation

privacy devices

CONVERSATIONPRIVACYDEVICES



BUTTON MODULE BUTTON MODULE

Name taglighting

Name taglighting Name tag

lighting

ELECTRIC LOCK ELECTRIC LOCK

LockRelease

LockRelease

DOOR UNIT DOOR UNITRELAYBOX

8 −−−− sec.1b

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO TWO OUTDOOR STATIONSWITH SECRECY OF CONVERSATION


1+(n-2)

1+(n-1)

1+n

7+n6+n

2 2

2

2

FUNCTION

The 1+1 wire door phone system makes it possible to set up systems in which a door phone riser is to be connected to two entrances each with 1 push button panel with related loudspeaking unit.Adding a specifi c relay device, a person can press a key of one of the two push button panels so that the user of the door phone called, on lifting the handset, is automatically connected with the calling push button panel excluding the other service.Therefore in this system, it is not possible to speak from two outdoor stations at the same time in that functioning of these is alternative.to guarantee secrecy of conversation of all the door phones in the system, the specifi c secrecy circuits (one for each button) are inserted inside only one of the two push button panels. Release of the electric lock is also enabled by the secrecy circuit. This means that a user cannot release the lock unless he/she has been called and can open only the lock corresponding to the push button panel from which the call has been made.

EQUIPMENT





N. X Transformer Ref. 9000/230N. 1 Relay box Ref. 788/51


725 modelN. 2 Panels with N buttons Mod. 725N. 2 Amplifi ed door unit Ref. 1035/67N. X/4 Conversation privacy device Ref. 1035/25

The panels must be installed in fl ush-mounting boxes with module holder frames or in cases with hood for wall-mounted versions. Refer to “Panels with anodized aluminium front plate Mod. 725” section of Doorphone and Videodoorphone system - product technical manual.

or

Domus Aura model N. 2 Panels with N buttons Mod. 1110N. 2 Amplifi ed door unit Ref. 1035/67N. X/4 Conversation privacy device Ref. 1110/74

For the panels references and the accessories refer to “Panels Domus Aura” section of Doorphone and Videodoorphone system - product technical manual.

DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C1.002VX.006VX.014

sec.1b−−−− 9

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


COLUMN


(VX.014)

(VX.006)

4PSSN

1/~3

2~

5

P.E.

11 44

~

~

~12~0

CA1

2

1

107

83SN2

C26

9

41

2C1

1112

SN1

~0~125

~~~12~0

~ ~ ~ ~012

11 44

P.E.

SN

1/~

4

2

PS

~

35

CA1

2

1

ELECTRIC LOCK

LockRelease

ELECTRIC LOCK

LockRelease

MAIN ~MAIN ~

N.2 TRANSFORMERS

MAIN ~

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

RELAYBOX

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO TWO OUTDOOR STATIONSWITH SECRECY OF CONVERSATION


SC101-0937B

10 −−−− sec.1b

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO FOUR OUTDOOR STATIONSWITH SECRECY OF CONVERSATION


1+(n-2)

1+(n-1)

1+n

8+n8+n

9+n8+n

2

2

FUNCTION

The 1+1 wire door phone system makes it possible to set up systems in which a door phone riser is to be connected to four entrances each with 1 push button panel with related loudspeaking unit.Adding a specifi c relay device, a person can press a key of one of the two push button panels so that the user of the door phone called, on lifting the handset, is automatically connected with the calling push button panel excluding the other service.Therefore in this system, it is not possible to speak from four outdoor stations at the same time in that functioning of these is alternative.To guarantee secrecy of conversation of all the door phones in the system, the specifi c secrecy circuits (one for each button) are inserted inside only one of the two push button panels. Release of the electric lock is also enabled by the secrecy circuit. This means that a user cannot release the lock unless he/she has been called and can open only the lock corresponding to the push button panel from which the call has been made.

EQUIPMENT





N. 4 Transformer Ref. 9000/230N. 1 Relay box Ref. 788/54




or

K-Steel model N. X Button modules Ref. 1155/11-/12A-/13A-/14AN. 4 Module with door unit Ref. 1155/30-/31-/32AN. X/4 Conversation privacy device Ref. 1145/74


DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C1.002


C4.007C4.008VX.006VX.014

VX.021Cut or remove the jumpers on the device(s):a) PS – G/Tb) 4 – F

sec.1b−−−− 11

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO FOUR OUTDOOR STATIONSWITH SECRECY OF CONVERSATION


SC101-1218C

(C4.006)(VX.021)

(C4.007)

(VX.006)

COLUMN

(C4.008)

(C4.006)(VX.021)(VX.021)

(C4.006)

"D"

(C4.007)(C4.008)(C4.008)

(C4.007)

(VX.021)(C4.006)

(C4.008)(C4.007)

"A""B"

"C"

TRANSFORMERLIGHT BULB

(VX.014)

TRANSFORMER

TRANSFORMER

TRANSFORMER

~ ~12~0~ ~~0~12 ~

3

C1

2

11/~

~

C2

U1

SN

G/T G/T

~12

~0~12~0

4

F

5

PS

1 4

1

C2

4

C1

C3C4 ~12

G/T

G/T~0

~12~0U3

U2

U4

U1

~0~12G/T

G/T~0

~12U1U2U3U4

RETE ~

CA1

1

2

3

C1

2

11/~

~

C2

U1

SN

G/T G/T

~12

~0~12~0

4

F

5

PS

CA1

1

2

U3U2

~0~12G/T

G/TU1

U4

~0~12

~ ~0 ~12~

3

C1

2

11/~

~

C2

U1

F

SN

G/TG/T

~12

~0~12~0

54PS

~ ~12 ~0~

U3U2

~0~12G/T

G/TU1

U4

~0~12

~~12~0 ~

V5V3

C

SE2-6+6R1

V3SN3

C3+TC

D

621R2R1 9

+TCC4

SE2

V3

-6+6R1

SN4

6+ +

SE TC 0~~

A B~~

12 R1 6-R2AP

+TCC1

SE2

A V3

-6+6R1

SN1 B

+6R1

V3SN2

SE2-6

C2+TC

1~0~12

~0~12

1

V5V5

1

~12~0

V5~12V5

~01

3

C1

2

11/~

~

C2

U1

F

SN

G/TG/T

~12

~0~12~0

54PS

RELAYBOX

COLUMN

VOLTAGE

INPUT INPUT

INPUT INPUT


BUTTONS MODULE


BUTTONS MODULE


BUTTONS MODULE


BUTTONS MODULE

DOOR UNIT

MAIN ~

MAIN ~

TRANSFORMER

ELECTRIC LOCK

DOOR UNIT

ELECTRIC LOCK

DOOR UNITDOOR UNIT

ELECTRIC LOCKELECTRIC LOCK

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

LockRelease

MAIN ~

MAIN ~

LockRelease

LockRelease

LockRelease


privacy devices

CONVERSATIONPRIVACY DEVICES

12 −−−− sec.1b

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


CONNECTION OF SEVERAL COLUMN OF DOOR PHONESTO COMMON OUTDOOR STATIONS

Each group in also connected to its own secondary outdoor station(Panels Mod. Sinthesi or K-Steel)

1+(n-2)

1+(n-1)

1+n

9+n 3+n 9+n3+n

2

2

1+(n-2)

2+(K-2)+n+n...

8+K+n+n...

2 2

2

1+(n-1)

1+n

2

2


FUNCTION

It is the ideal solution for residential centers where the single villas have to be connected to both their own outdoor stations and a common one at the main entrance. During the call the concerned door phone is automatically switched to the common outdoor station or to the one of the group it belongs to, by means of a switching relay.Services towards secondary outdoor stations are independent and can therefore take place at the same time.When the call comes from the common outdoor station, only the group the called door phone belongs to is switched to it, the others being able to carry on the normal service with their own secondary outdoor stations.To guarantee secrecy of conversation of all the door phones in the system, the specifi c secrecy circuits (one for each button) are inserted inside only one of the two push button panels. Release of the electric lock is also enabled by the secrecy circuit. This means that a user cannot release the lock unless he/she has been called and can open only the lock corresponding to the push button panel from which the call has been made.

EQUIPMENT





N. K+1 Transformer Ref. 9000/230N. K Relay box Ref. 788/51


Sinthesi modelN. X Button modules Ref. 1145/11-/12-/13-/14N. K+1 Module with door unit set-up Ref. 1145/20-/21N. K+1 Amplifi ed door unit Ref. 1145/67N. X/4 Conversation privacy device Ref. 1145/74


or

K-Steel model N. Y Button modules Ref. 1155/11-/12A-/13A-/14AN. K+1 Module with door unit Ref. 1155/30-/31-/32AN. X/4 Conversation privacy device Ref. 1145/74


DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C1.002C4.007C4.008VX.006VX.014

VX.021Cut or remove the jumpers on the device(s):a) 4 – F

sec.1b−−−− 13

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


CONNECTION OF SEVERAL COLUMN OF DOOR PHONESTO COMMON OUTDOOR STATIONS

Each group in also connected to its own secondary outdoor station(Panels Mod. Sinthesi or K-Steel)

SC101-1241B

1/~

C1 1

(VX.006)

(VX.014)

(VX.014)

(C4.008)

(C4.008)

C1

(VX.021)

(C4.007)

(C4.007)

(VX.021)

(C4.017)

(C4.017)

1/~

1

G/T

G/T~12~0

~12

U2~0

U3U4

U1

U2U3

~12 U4G/T

~0U1~12

G/T

~0

G/T

G/T~12~0

~12

U2~0

U3U4

U1

~ ~ ~12

~0

C267

18

4

~0

311 9

1214

5

10

C1

~12

15SN2

SN12

13

U3U4

U1U2

~0~12G/T

G/TC1C2C3C4

~0~12

4

4

1

1

U2U3

~12 U4G/T

~0U1~12

G/T

~0

~~~ ~12

G/T

G/T~12~0

~12

U2~0

U3U4

U1

CA1

1

2

C1C2

PS

~2

11/~

3

4F

5SN

CA1

1

2

5

F3SN1/~1~2

C1C2

4PS

~~~12

~0

U3U4

U1U2

~0~12G/T

G/TC1C2C3C4

~0~12

4

4

1

1

U2U3

~12 U4G/T

~0U1~12

G/T

~0

~ ~ ~ ~12



BUTTONS MODULE


privacy devices


DOOR UNIT

ELECTRIC LOCK

ELECTRIC LOCK

LockRelease

LockRelease

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

RELAYBOX

MAIN ~



MAIN ~

MAIN ~

MAIN ~

TRANSFORMER

TRANSFORMER

To relay


SECONDARYENTRYTo the

followingmodule

BUTTONS MODULE

TO THE FOLLOWING

GROUP

Calls

Common

MAIN ENTRY

DOOR UNIT

14 −−−− sec.1b

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S



FUNCTION

This service is particularly required by professional offi ces, where a lot of people coming in and out obliges to often open the door without the use of the door phone to talk with the outside. Diagram SC101-1327 shows the connection of a door phone to a normal 1+1 wire electrical door phone system. Equip the system with a relay Ref. 788/22, a power unit Ref. 1090/850 and a timed relay Ref.1032/81.The concerned door phone will energise the door phone which will in turn release the electrical lock when the switch (not supplied by us) is positioned during the call step.

EQUIPMENT

The following devices are needed for the system illustrated in diagram SC101-1327:


N. X Door phones Mod. Utopia Ref. 1134/35 orN. X Door phone Mod. Atlantico Ref. 1133/35A


N. 1 Transformer Ref. 9000/230N. 1 Relay box Ref. 788/22N. 1 Timer Ref. 1032/81

DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.023

VX.021Cut or remove the jumpers on the device(s):a) AMCR

1+n

1+n

2

1+n

FROM RISINGCOLUMN

sec.1b−−−− 15

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S



SC101-1327

(C4.023)(VX.021)

-/~SE2

+24+12/~-/~

NC

APNOC

2

1

~0

230

~12

0

NC

CH-CH+

0LNA

+L+

C


MAIN~

TRANSFORMER

TIMER TOELECTRIC LOCK

RELAYBOX

FROM RISINGCOLUMN

SINGLECALLS

COMMON

SWITCHN.N.F.

16 −−−− sec.1b

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


RELEASE OF TWO ELECTRICAL LOCKS AT THE SAME TIMEa) 725 or Domus Aura door unit b) Sinthesi or K-Steel door unit

SC101-1269A

~12

CA2

S3S1

~0S2

~12 ~0 ~~~12~0

3SN

2

1/~~

4

F

1

PS

~0

~12

5

1/~

PS

54

SN

3

2~ ~12

CA2

S3S1

~0S2

~12~0~ ~ ~12 ~0 ~~

Example "A"

Example "B"

MAIN~ MAIN~

MAIN~ MAIN~

Lock Release

SupplementaryLock Release

Lock Release

SupplementaryLock Release

RELAYRef.788/52

RELAYRef.788/52

ELECTRIC LOCK

SUPPLEMENTARYELECTRIC LOCK

ELECTRIC LOCK

SUPPLEMENTARYELECTRIC LOCK

TRANSFORMERRef.9000/230

SUPPLEMENTARYTRANSFORMERRef.9000/230


SUPPLEMENTARYTRANSFORMERRef.9000/230

~ ~

sec.1c −−−− 1

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


BASIC DIAGRAMS FOR TRADITIONAL CALL

DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS

SECTION 1C(REV.C)


I −−−− sec.1c

SECTION 1C CONTENTS


DO

OR

PH

ON

E A

ND

VID

EO

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

M -

DIA

GR

AM

- S

ectio

n 1C


Diagram Sec. Pag.BASIC DIAGRAMS FOR TRADITIONAL CALL DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS

CONNECTION OF DOOR PHONES TO 1 OUTDOOR STATION ................................................................ SC101-1247A .............. 1c ................2

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 2 OUTDOOR STATIONS ............................................ SC101-0440B .............. 1c ................4

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 3 OR 4 OUTDOOR STATIONS...................................SC101-0441C .............. 1c ................6

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL COLUMNS OF DOOR PHONES TO 1 MAIN OUTDOOR STATIONEach column is also connected to its own outdoor station ............................................................................ SC101-0461B .............. 1c ................8

sec.1c −−−− II

SECTION 1C CONTENTS


DO

OR

PH

ON

E A

ND

VID

EO

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

M -

DIA

GR

AM

- S

ectio

n 1C


TRADITIONAL CALL DOOR PHONE SYSTEM DIAGRAM CROSS-REFERENCE TABLE





CONNECTION OF DOOR PHONES TO 1 OUTDOOR STATION 2

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL COLUMNS OF DOOR PHONES TO 1 MAIN OUTDOOR STATIONEach column is also connected to its own outdoor station 8

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 2 OUTDOOR STATIONS 4

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 3 OR 4 OUTDOOR STATIONS 6

DIAGRAM

SC101-1247A

SC101-0461B

SC101-0440B

SC101-0441C

K = number of columns with panelNOTE: The diagrams shown in this table can be made using Sinthesi, K-Steel, 725 panel models.

1

1

2

4

0

K

0

0

2 −−−− sec.1c

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

CONNECTION OF DOOR PHONES TO 1 OUTDOOR STATION

5

5

4+(n-2)

4+(n-1)

4+n

9+n

2

FUNCTION

This is certainly the most common type of door phone system.Press a button on the panel outside the building door to make the buzzer of the corresponding door phone ring. Lift the handset of the called door phone to establish a conversation with the door unit.Simply fully press the handset hook to operate the electrical door lock.Using the door phone Ref. 1130/55 must press the button no the handset to estabilish a conversation with the door unit; simply picking up the handset is not suffi cient.The advantage is that any handsets left accidentally off-hook do not interfer with the optimal operation of the other door phones.

EQUIPMENT



N. X Door phones Mod. 1130 Ivory colour Ref. 1130 White colour Ref. 1130/50 orN. X Door phones Mod. 1130 with insertion key White colour Ref. 1130/55






or



or



or



DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.001C4.004C4.007C4.008VX.014

sec.1c −−−− 3

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


CONNECTION OF DOOR PHONES TO 1 OUTDOOR STATION

SC101-1247A

COLUMN

(C4.007)(C4.008)

(C4.004)

(VX.014)


~

~

~12~0

21

6

98

1011

7

-

1A

12

L

+

~12~0

G/T~0

~12

U2

G/TU1PS

-6

~

~18

+6

~0

~12

-J

~

U2U3U4

U1

~12

~0~12

G/T~0

G/T

21

6

98

1011

7

MAIN ~

MAIN ~

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

ELECTRICLOCK

LockRelease


PHONE SYSTEM

4 −−−− sec.1c

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


5

5

4+(n-2)

4+(n-1)

4+n

7+n 7+n

2 2

FUNCTION

This type of installation solves the problem to connect a series of door phones of a building with 2 entrances each one equipped with a push button panel.This solution permits, by simply pushing a button from one of the 2 push button panels, to connect automatically the user to the calling push button panels unhooking the handset. This type of installation does not allow to talk from both outdoor stations simultaneously, since they work alternatively.

EQUIPMENT



N. X Door phones Mod. 1130 Ivory colour Ref. 1130 White colour Ref. 1130/50






or



or



or



DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.001C4.007C4.008VX.014

sec.1c −−−− 5

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S



SC101-0440B

COLUMN

(C4.008)(C4.007)

(C4.008)(C4.007)

(VX.014)

13

SN1

14

10

7

1C2C~

12

~

6

8

SN2

0

9

1

5 2

14

3

15

112

-

1A

12

L

+

~12~0

G/T~0

~12

U2

G/TU1

21

6

98

1011

7

-

1A

12

L

+

G/T~0

G/T~12

~0

U2U1

~12

-6

~ ~ +0 621 J

- PS~ ~~0

~21

~ ~

~0~12

U4

U2U1

~12 U3

G/T~0

G/T

21

6

98

1011

7

U2U3U4

U1

~12

~0~12

G/T~0

G/T

RELAYBOX

Lock Release

LockRelease

ELECTRICLOCK

ELECTRICLOCK

MAIN ~ MAIN ~

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

Name taglighting



PHONE SYSTEM

6 −−−− sec.1c

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 3 OR 4 OUTDOOR STATIONS

5+n

6

5+(n-1)

6

5+(n-2)

22

7+n 7+n

22

7+n 7+n

FUNCTION

This installation allows connection of a series of door phone to 3 or 4 push button panels.By simply pushing a button on one of the 4 panels, the called door phone, picking up the handset, is automatically connected with the calling push button panel.It is not possible to talk from the outdoor stations simultaneously, since they work alternatively.

EQUIPMENT









or



or



or



DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.001C4.007C4.008VX.014

sec.1c −−−− 7

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


CONNECTION OF SEVERAL DOOR PHONES TO 3 OR 4 OUTDOOR STATIONS

SC101-0441B

(C4.007)(C4.008)

(C4.007)(C4.008)

(C4.007)(C4.008)

(C4.007)(C4.008)

POWER SUPPLYFOR HOUSE

PHONE SYSTEMLIGHT BULBTRANSFORMER

(VX.014)

21

6

98

1011

7

L

+

2-

1

1A

U1G/T ~12

~0~12

G/T~0

U2

G/T~0

~12

~0~12U2

U1G/T

U3U4

~0

~21

~ ~

21

6

98

1011

7

G/T~0~12

~0~12 U2

U1G/T

U3U4

L

+

2-

1

1A

U1G/T~12

~0~12

G/T~0

U2

L

+

2-

1

1A

U1G/T ~12

~0~12

G/T~0

U2

IIIIII1

2

SN3

IIIAP

12

IIII

21

SN2

IIAP

III-

- II

1C 2C0-~ ~

21

IV12

IV

SN4

AP IV

II12

SN1

AP I

- IV

I-

PA

G/T~0

~12

~0~12U2

U1G/T

U3U4

G/T~0~12

~0~12 U2

U1G/T

U3U4

~

~0

-6

PS

-J

~12+6

~18

~

L

+

2-

1

1A

U1G/T~12

~0~12

G/T~0

U2






Name taglighting

Name taglighting

MAIN~MAIN~

LockRelease


ELECTRIC LOCK

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

LockRelease

LockRelease

ELECTRIC LOCK

Name taglighting

LockRelease

RELAYBOX

8 −−−− sec.1c

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


4+n 4+n

4+(n-1) 4+(n-1)

5 5

5 5

4+(n-2) 4+(n-2)

69+n 5+n 9+n5+n5+K+n

8+K+n+n...

2

2

2

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL COLUMNS OF DOOR PHONES TO 1 MAINOUTDOOR STATION

Each column is also connected to its own outdoor station

FUNCTION

It is the ideal solution for residential centers where the single villas have to be connected to both their own outdoor stations and a common one at the main entrance.During the call the concerned door phone is automatically switched to the common outdoor station or to the one of the group it belongs to, by means of a switching relay. Services towards secondary outdoor stations are independent and can therefore take place at the same time.When the call comes from the common outdoor station, only the group the called door phone belongs to is switched to it, the others being able to carry on the normal service with their own secondary outdoor stations.

EQUIPMENT





N. K+1 Power supply for door phone system 28VA Ref. 786/11N. K Relay box Ref. 788/51N. K Call repeater relay Ref. 788/52


Sinthesi model N. X Button modules Ref. 1145/11-/12-/13-/14N. K+1 Module with door unit set-up Ref. 1145/20-/21-/22N. K+1 Amplifi ed door unit Ref. 1145/500


or



or



or



DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.001C4.007C4.008

sec.1c −−−− 9

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


SC101-0461B

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL COLUMNS OF DOOR PHONES TO 1 MAINOUTDOOR STATION

Each column is also connected to its own outdoor station

2nd COLUMN1st COLUMN

(C4.008)(C4.007)

(C4.008)(C4.007)

SN1

41

-67


(VX.014)

SN1

7

14-6

U4

U2

G/T

U1

U3

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12U3

U1

U4

U2

G/T

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12U3

U1

U4

U2

G/T

+1A

L12-

G/T~0~12

~0~12U2

U1G/T

U3U4

21

6

98

1011

7

21

6

98

1011

7

~ ~0 -6 +6~12~

S2C6~0

~12S3S12CA

G/T~0~12

~0~12U2

U1G/T

U3U4

L

+

2-

U1G/T ~12

~0~12

G/T~0

U2

1

1A

~-6 ~0~12 +6 ~ ~0

~21

~ ~

3

SN2

8 25

6

~

13

0

915

1

SN1

4

147

101112

~21CC 21

U4

U2

G/T

U1

U3

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12U3

U1

U4

U2

G/T

U4

U2

G/T

U1

U3

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12

RELAYBOX

Lock Release

LockRelease

ELECTRIC LOCK

ELECTRICLOCK

MAIN ~

MAIN ~MAIN ~


PHONE SYSTEM


PHONE SYSTEM



Name taglighting

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

CONNECTION AS1ST GROUP

CALLREPEATER RELAY

TO

TH

E F

OLL

OW

ING

C

OLU

MN

Calls

Common

10 −−−− sec.1c

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

sec.1d−−−− 1DOOR PHONE - VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS: Installation Diagrams

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

BASIC DIAGRAMSFOR COAX ELECTRONIC


SECTION 1D(REV.C)


SECTION 1D CONTENTS


DO

OR

PH

ON

E A

ND

VID

EO

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

M -

DIA

GR

AM

- S

ectio

n 1D


Diagram Sec. Pag.BASIC DIAGRAMSFOR COAX ELECTRONIC VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS

CONNECTION OF MAX. 2 VIDEO DOOR PHONES TO 1 VIDEO DOOR UNIT .......................................... SV102-3146D ..............1d ................2

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONES TO 1 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATION ...................... SV102-2631E ..............1d ................4

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONES AND HOUSE PHONESTO 1 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATIONConnection in the riser of a number of house phones with voice service only ............................................... SV102-1609E ..............1d ................6

CONNECTION OF 4 VIDEO DOOR PHONES TO 1 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATIONThe video outdoor station calls the 4 video door phonesin parallel with concurrent power-on............................................................................................................... SV102-2066D ..............1d ................8

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONES TO 1 OUTDOOR STATIONEQUIPPED WITH A SEPARATE CCD TV CAMERAPossibility of automatic connection by the video door phones to the TV camera........................................... SV102-3118C ..............1d ............. 10

CONNECTION OF 1 VIDEO DOOR PHONE TO 1 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATIONPossibility of automatic activation of a second control tv camera................................................................... SV102-3119A ..............1d ............. 12

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONES TO 2 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATIONS.................... SV102-2892D ..............1d ............. 14

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONE GROUPSTO 1 VIDEO DOOR UNIT AND 1 DOOR UNIT ............................................................................................. SV102-2934C ..............1d ............. 16

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONES TO 4 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATIONS.................... SV102-3078B ..............1d ............. 18

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONE COLUMNSTO A MAIN VIDEO OUTDOOR STATIONEach column is connected to 1 proper secondary video outdoor station ....................................................... SV102-3079A ..............1d ............. 20

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONE COLUMNSTO 1 MAIN VIDEO OUTDOOR STATIONEach columns is also connected to its own secondary outdoor station.......................................................... SV102-2935E ..............1d ............. 22

CONNECTION OF 3 INTERCOM VIDEO DOOR PHONES WITH POSSIBILITYOF ANSWERING CALLS FROM 1 ELECTRICAL VIDEO DOOR UNITSingle call from outside with concurrent power-on ......................................................................................... SV102-2970D ..............1d ............. 24

CONNECTION OF MAXIMUM 9 INTERCOM ATLANTICO VIDEO DOOR PHONESWITH POSSIBILITY OF ANSWERING CALLS FROM 1 ELECTRICAL VIDEO DOOR UNITSingle call from the outside with concurrent power-on ................................................................................... SV102-2972D ..............1d ............. 26

CONNECTION OF 3 INTERCOM Atlantico VIDEO DOOR PHONES WITH POSSIBILITYOF ANSWERING CALLS FROM 2 ELECTRICAL VIDEO DOOR UNITSThe video outdoor stations call the video door phones in parallel with concurrent power-on ........................ SV102-3257A ..............1d ............. 28

CONNECTION OF A CALL REPEATER RELAY IN PARALLELTO THE VIDEO DOOR PHONE................ SV102-1469D ..............1d ............. 30

CONNECTION IN PARALLEL OF 1 VIDEO DOOR PHONE AND 1 DOOR PHONE.................................... SV102-1574C ..............1d ............. 30

CONNECTION OF A CALL REPEATER RELAY IN PARALLEL TO THE VIDEO DOOR PHONE............... SV102-0782D ..............1d ............. 31

CONNECTION OF 3 VIDEO DOOR PHONE EXTENSIONS IN PARALLELTO A SYSTEM WITH VIDEO DOOR UNITThe video door phones are called at the same time....................................................................................... SV102-2132E ..............1d ............. 32

CORRISPONDENCE OF TERMINALS BETWEENScaitel AND Sentry+ OR Atlantico VIDEODOORPHONE.............................................................................. SV102-1977A ..............1d ............. 32

CONNECTION OF 3 INTERCOM VIDEO DOOR PHONE EXTENSIONSTO A SYSTEM WITH VIDEO DOOR UNITSingle call from outside with concurrent power-on ......................................................................................... SV102-1349E ..............1d ............. 34

CONNECTION OF N VIDEO DOOR PHONES TO 1 VIDEO DOOR UNITDistance between video door phone and video door unit in the range from 300 to 1000 metres .................. SV102-1241D ..............1d ............. 36

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL COLOURS VIDEO DOOR PHONES TO 1 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATION.... SV102-3063A ..............1d ............. 38

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONES TO 1 DOOR UNIT Door open indicator on video door phones..................................................................................................... SV102-3228A ..............1d ............. 40

I −−−− sec.1d

SECTION 1D CONTENTS


DO

OR

PH

ON

E A

ND

VID

EO

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

M -

DIA

GR

AM

- S

ectio

n 1D


CONNECTION OF N FREE-HANDS UTOPIA COLOUR VIDEO DOOR PHONESTO 1 VIDEO DOOR UNIT AND TO 1 DOOR UNIT ..........................................................................................SV102-3227 ..............1d ............. 42

CONNECTION OF N FREE-HANDS COLOUR VIDEO DOOR PHONE COLUMNSTO 1 MAIN VIDEO DOOR UNIT Each column is additionally connected to a specifi c secondary door unit ........................................................SV102-3235 ..............1d ............. 44

CONNECTION OF 3 INTERCOM UTOPIA VIDEO DOOR PHONES WITH POSSIBILITYOF ANSWERING CALLS FROM 1 ELECTRICAL VIDEO DOOR UNIT...........................................................SV102-3219 ..............1d ............. 46

CONNECTION OF 2 INTERCOM UTOPIA VIDEO DOOR PHONES WITH POSSIBILITYOF ANSWERING CALLS FROM 1 ELECTRICAL VIDEO DOOR UNITSingle call from outside with concurrent power-on ............................................................................................SV102-3220 ..............1d ............. 48

EXAMPLES OF COAXIAL CABLE CONNECTION ..........................................................................................SV102-3294 ..............1d ............. 50

EXAMPLES OF COAXIAL CABLE CONNECTION ..........................................................................................SV102-3295 ..............1d ............. 51

EXAMPLES OF COAXIAL CABLE CONNECTION ....................................................................................... SV102-3296A ..............1d ............. 52

EXAMPLE OF CONNECTION TVCC CAMERE OR MICROCAMERA ......................................................... SV102-3229A ..............1d ............. 53

sec.1d −−−− II

SECTION 1D CONTENTS


DO

OR

PH

ON

E A

ND

VID

EO

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

M -

DIA

GR

AM

- S

ectio

n 1D


COAX VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEM DIAGRAM CROSS-REFERENCE TABLE

WITH BLACK AND WHITE CAMERA

Use of kits

4

6

22

20

14

28

16

12

8

24

26

18

31

32

36

SV102-2631E

SV102-1609E

SV102-2935E

SV102-3079A

SV102-2892D

30SV102-1574C

30SV102-1469D

SV102-3257A

SV102-2934C

SV102-3119A

SV102-2066D

SV102-2970D

SV102-2972D

SV102-3078B

SV102-0782D

SV102-2132E

34SV102-1349E

SV102-1241D

SV102-3118C 10

1

2

4

0 00 √COLLEGAMENTO DI MAX 2 VIDEOCITOFONI AD 1 VIDEOPORTIERE ELETTRICO 2SV102-3146D0 00 √ √

0 00 √

0 00 √

√

√√

0 00

0 00

√ √√

√ √

√

0 00

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

0 00

0 K0 √

0 01 √

0 00 √ √

0 00

0 00

√

0 00 √

K 00 √


Number of main video door phone panels to be installed

Number of video door phone secondary panels to be installed

Number of main door phone panels to be installed

Number of secondary door phone panels to be installed


Calls from panel in parallel: each user has several video door phones in the apartment


Auto-on: users can switch the video door phone on also if no call is received

Monitor with CCTV cameras

Use of some door phones for audio service only

Use of devices in parallel with a video door phone

Distance between video door phones and video door unit from 300 to 1000 metres

DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION PAGDIAGRAM

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONES TO 1 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATION

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONES AND HOUSE PHONES TO 1 VIDEOOUTDOOR STATION. Connection in the riser of a number of house phones with voice service only

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONES TO 1 OUTDOOR STATIONEQUIPPED WITH A SEPARATE CCD TV CAMERAPossibility of automatic connection by the video door phones to the TV camera

CONNECTION OF 1 VIDEO DOOR PHONE TO 1 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATIONPossibility of automatic activation of a second control tv camera

CONNECTION OF 4 VIDEO DOOR PHONES TO 1 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATIONThe video outdoor station calls the 4 video door phones in parallel with concurrent power-on

CONNECTION OF 3 INTERCOM VIDEO DOOR PHONES WITH POSSIBILITYOF ANSWERING CALLS FROM 1 ELECTRICAL VIDEO DOOR UNITSingle call from outside with concurrent power-on

CONNECTION OF MAXIMUM 9 INTERCOM Atlantico VIDEO DOOR PHONESWITH POSSIBILITY OF ANSWERING CALLS FROM 1 ELECTRICAL VIDEO DOOR UNITSingle call from the outside with concurrent power-on

CONNECTION OF N VIDEO DOOR PHONES TO 1 VIDEO DOOR UNITDistance between video door phone and video door unit in the range from 300 to 1000 metres

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONE COLUMNSTO 1 MAIN VIDEO OUTDOOR STATIONEach columns is also connected to its own secondary outdoor station

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONE COLUMNSTO A MAIN VIDEO OUTDOOR STATIONEach column is connected to 1 proper secondary video outdoor station

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONE GROUPSTO 1 VIDEO DOOR UNIT AND 1 DOOR UNIT

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONES TO 2 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATIONS

CONNECTION OF 3 INTERCOM Atlantico VIDEO DOOR PHONES WITH POSSIBILITYOF ANSWERING CALLS FROM 2 ELECTRICAL VIDEO DOOR UNITSThe video outdoor stations call the video door phones in parallel with concurrent power-on

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONES TO 4 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATIONS

CONNECTION OF A CALL REPEATER RELAY IN PARALLEL TO THE VIDEO DOOR PHONE

CONNECTION OF 3 VIDEO DOOR PHONE EXTENSIONS IN PARALLELTO A SYSTEM WITH VIDEO DOOR UNITThe video door phones are called at the same time

CONNECTION OF 3 INTERCOM VIDEO DOOR PHONE EXTENSIONSTO A SYSTEM WITH VIDEO DOOR UNITSingle call from outside with concurrent power-on

CONNECTION IN PARALLEL OF 1 VIDEO DOOR PHONE AND 1 DOOR PHONE

CONNECTION OF A CALL REPEATER RELAY IN PARALLELTOTHE VIDEO DOOR PHONE

K = number of columns with panel NOTE: The diagrams shown in this table can be made using Sinthesi, K-Steel, 725 panel models.

III −−−− sec.1d

SECTION 1D CONTENTS


DO

OR

PH

ON

E A

ND

VID

EO

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

M -

DIA

GR

AM

- S

ectio

n 1D


WITH COLOUR CAMERA








Auto-on: users can switch the video door phone on also if no call is received

Monitor with CCTV cameras


Use of free-hands Utopia video door phone

Door open indicator on video door phone


CONNECTION OF SEVERAL COLOURS VIDEO DOOR PHONESTO 1 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATION

38

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONES TO 1 DOOR UNIT Door open indicator on video door phones 40

CONNECTION OF N FREE-HANDS UTOPIA COLOUR VIDEO DOOR PHONESTO 1 VIDEO DOOR UNIT AND TO 1 DOOR UNIT 42

CONNECTION IN PARALLEL OF 1 VIDEO DOOR PHONE AND 1 DOOR PHONE 30

CONNECTION OF A CALL REPEATER RELAY IN PARALLEL TO THE VIDEO DOOR PHONE 31

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONES TO 1 OUTDOOR STATIONEQUIPPED WITH A SEPARATE CCD TV CAMERAPossibility of automatic connection by the video door phones to the TV camera 10

CONNECTION OF 1 VIDEO DOOR PHONE TO 1 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATIONPossibility of automatic activation of a second control tv camera 12

CONNECTION OF 2 INTERCOM UTOPIA VIDEO DOOR PHONES WITH POSSIBILITYOF ANSWERING CALLS FROM 1 ELECTRICAL VIDEO DOOR UNITSingle call from outside with concurrent power-on 48

CONNECTION OF N FREE-HANDS COLOUR VIDEO DOOR PHONE COLUMNSTO 1 MAIN VIDEO DOOR UNITEach column is additionally connected to a specific secondary door unit 44

CONNECTION OF A CALL REPEATER RELAY IN PARALLELTO THE VIDEO DOOR PHONE 30

CONNECTION OF 3 INTERCOM UTOPIA VIDEO DOOR PHONES WITH POSSIBILITYOF ANSWERING CALLS FROM 1 ELECTRICAL VIDEO DOOR UNIT

DIAGRAM

SV102-3063A

SV102-3228A

SV102-3227

SV102-1574C

SV102-0782D

SV102-3118C

SV102-3119A

SV102-3220

SV102-3235

SV102-1469D

SV102-3219 46

1

0 0 √

0 0 √√

0 0 √

0 0 √ √

√

√

0 0 √ √ √ √

√√

√√

√

√

K = number of columns with panel NOTE: The diagrams shown in this table can be made using Sinthesi, K-Steel, 725 panel models.

0 0

√ √0 K

√ √1 0

sec.1d −−−− IV

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

2 −−−− sec.1d DOOR PHONE - VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS: Installation Diagrams

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

CONNECTION OF MAX. 2 VIDEO DOOR PHONES TO 1 VIDEO DOOR UNIT

8+coax

10+coax

2

7+coax

7+coax

TC

FUNCTION

This system allows connection between the video outdoor station and the various video door phones situated in the apartments. When the visitor presses a button on the push button panel, the bitonal electronic call is sent to the corresponding video door phone loudspeaker and, after about 7 seconds, the image appears on the screen. At this point the user sees the visitor and can answer, if he wishes, unhooking the handset. At the end of the conversation, the electric lock can be operated by pressing the key ( ).Vision of the image lasts about 60 seconds, after which the intervention of the built-in timer in the power supply causes it to go off. If a second video door phone is called before the end of the 60 seconds, the fi rst video door phone will automatically go off and the latter comes on. This feature guarantees secrecy of vision.

EQUIPMENT

The following devices are needed for the system illustrated in diagram SV102-3146D:

“COAX” VIDEO DOOR PHONE KIT DIAGRAMS

N. 1 One-family kit (1 button) with Atlantico video door phone Ref. 1702/611 consisting of: • Sinthesi camera with integrated door unit and 1 calling

button Ref. 1745/81 • 1 Atlantico video door phone Ref. 1702/1 with bracket

Ref. 1202/90 • 1 fl ush mounting box for 1 module Ref. 1145/51 • Module holder with frame for 1 module Ref. 1145/61 • Power unit 230Vac-38VA, 10 DIN modules Ref. 789/5B or N. 1 One-family kit (1 button) with Artico video door phone Ref. 1705/621 consisting of: • Sinthesi camera with integrated door unit and 1 calling

button Ref. 1745/81 • 1 Artico video door phone Ref. 1705/1 with bracket

Ref. 1705/90 • 1 fl ush mounting box for 1 module Ref. 1145/51 • Module holder with frame for 1 module Ref. 1145/61 • Power unit 230Vac-38VA, 10 DIN modules Ref. 789/5B orN. 1 Two-family kit (2 buttons) with Atlantico video door phone Ref. 1702/612 consisting of: • Sinthesi camera with integrated door unit and 2 calling

buttons Ref. 1745/82 • 2 Atlantico video door phones Ref. 1702/1 with bracket

Ref. 1202/90 • 1 fl ush mounting box for 1 module Ref. 1145/51 • Module holder with frame for 1 module Ref. 1145/61 • Power unit 230Vac-38VA, 10 DIN modules Ref. 789/5B or N. 1 Two-family kit (2 buttons) with Artico video door phone Ref. 1705/622 consisting of: • Sinthesi camera with integrated door unit and 2 calling

buttons Ref. 1745/82 • 2 Artico video door phones Ref. 1705/1 with bracket

Ref. 1705/90 • 1 fl ush mounting box for 1 module Ref. 1145/51 • Module holder with frame for 1 module Ref. 1145/61 • Power unit 230Vac-38VA, 10 DIN modules Ref. 789/5B

DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

VX.003

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

CONNECTION OF MAX. 2 VIDEO DOOR PHONES TO 1 VIDEO DOOR UNIT

SV102-3146D

230

0

PS

AP

+6-6~0

SE2

R1R2

1/~+R

SE1

~12

R2

+TCR1

R1R2

V4V5V3

CA

126

R3Y2Y1X2X1

910

TC

+

1A2-

L

1

U1G/T

U2

V5V3

R1+TC

~12

~0

R1R2

V4V5V3

CA

126

R3Y2Y1X2X1

910

For two-familykits only

CAMERA UNITWITH DOOR UNITAND BUTTONS

MAIN~

Lock Release

VIDEOPOWER SUPPLY

ELECTRIC LOCK

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONESTO 1 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATION

6+(n-2)+coax

6+n+coax

9+n+coax

6+(n-1)+coax

2

7+coax

7+coax

TC

FUNCTION


EQUIPMENT

The following devices are needed for the system illustrated in diagram SV102-2631E:

VIDEO DOOR PHONE REFERENCES

Atlantico modelN. X Video door phones Ref. 1702/1N. X Bracket Ref. 1202/90

or

Artico modelN. X Video door phones Ref. 1705/1N. X Bracket Ref. 1705/90

VIDEO OUTDOOR STATION REFERENCES

TC

Sinthesi modelN. X Button modules Ref. 1145/11-/12-/13-/14N. 1 Module with camera and door unit Ref. 1745/80-/81-/82


or

K-Steel modelN. X Button modules Ref. 1155/11-/12A-/13A-/14AN. 1 Module with camera and door unit Ref. 1755/80


or

725 model N. 1 Panel with N buttons Mod. 725N. 1 Amplifi ed door unit Ref. 1128/500N. 1 Camera Ref. 725/600N. 1 Front plate Ref. 725/601-/602


or

1128 model N. 1 Front case for video door unit Ref. 1728/20-/21N. 1 Door unit with camera Ref. 1728/80N. X Front case Ref. 1128/10-/11N. X Button Ref. 1128/1-/2



N. 1 Video power supply Ref. 789/5BN. 1 Video distributor Ref. 1794/4A

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONESTO 1 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATION

SV102-2631E

(VX.008)

(C4.006)

(VX.014)

(VX.010)(VX.011)

(VD.002)

(C4.007)(C4.008)

R1R2

V4V5V3

CA

126

R3Y2Y1X2X1

910

ER1R2

U2

U1

~0~12

~

~

R1R1

+TC

R2

PS

AP

+6-6~0

SE1

~12

SE2

~

~

R1R2

V4V5V3

CA

126

R3Y2Y1X2X1

910

+TC

+

R1

1

L

~12~0

1A2

V5

-

V3

U4

U2

G/T

U1

U3

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12

TC

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12

U3

U1

U4

U2

G/T

LINE ~

Lock Release

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

VIDEOPOWER SUPPLY

MAIN ~LIGHT BULBTRANSFORMER


Name taglighting

Name taglighting

ELECTRIC LOCK

DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.006Sinthesi models only:Connect jumper L with G/T

C4.007 C4.008 VD.002 VX.003VX.008 VX.010 VX.011 VX.014

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONES AND HOUSE PHONES TO 1 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATION

Connection in the riser of a number of house phones with voice service only

FUNCTION

This system has the same operation features as the basic system (Scheme SV102-2631) with the possibility to add simple house phones onto the same riser with phonic service only.

EQUIPMENT




or



N. X Door phone Mod. Utopia Ref. 1134/1N. X Door phone Mod. Atlantico Ref. 1133


TC



or



or



or





6+(n-4)+coax

6+n+coax

11+n+coax

6+(n-3)+coax

2

5

5

6+(n-2)+coax

6+(n-1)+coax

7+coax

7+coax

TC

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

SV102-1609E

(VX.008)

(C4.006)

(VX.014)LIGHT BULBTRANSFORMER

(VD.002)

(C4.007)(C4.008)

(VX.010)(VX.011)

R1R2

V4V5V3

CA

126

R3Y2Y1X2X1

910

ER1R2

U2

U1

~0~12

~

~MAIN~

R1R1

+TC

R2

PS

AP

+6-6~0

SE1

~12

SE2

~

~

R1R2

V4V5V3

CA

126

R3Y2Y1X2X1

910

6

1

9

2

10

CA

6

1

9

2

10

CA

+TC

+

R1

1

L

~12~0

1A2

V5

-

V3

U4

U2

G/T

U1

U3

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12

TC

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12

U3

U1

U4

U2

G/T

TO THE FOLLOWINGVIDEO DOOR PHONES

TO THEFOLLOWINGMODULES

LINE~

ELECTRIC LOCK

VIDEOPOWER SUPPLY

Lock Release

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONES AND HOUSE PHONES TO 1 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATION

Connection in the riser of a number of house phones with voice service only

DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

VX.003 VX.008 VX.010 VX.011

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

FUNCTION

This system is particularly suited for detached houses where it is necessary to call and activate 4 video door phones concurrently using a single call key.As the video power supply can power only one video door phone, video door phones 2, 3 and 4 must be powered with a local power supply.

EQUIPMENT



Atlantico modelN. 4 Video door phones Ref. 1702/1N. 4 Bracket Ref. 1202/90

or

Artico modelN. 4 Video door phones Ref. 1705/1N. 4 Bracket Ref. 1705/90


TC

Sinthesi modelN. 1 Module with camera and door unit Ref. 1745/81


or

K-Steel modelN. 1 Module with camera and door unit Ref. 1755/81


or

725 model N. 1 Panel with 1 button Ref. 725/101N. 1 Amplifi ed door unit Ref. 1128/500N. 1 Camera Ref. 725/600N. 1 Front plate Ref. 725/601


or

1128 model N. 1 Front case for video door unit Ref. 1728/20-/21N. 1 Door unit with camera Ref. 1728/80N. 1 Button Ref. 1128/1-/2N. X Blank module Ref. 1128/30-/31



N. 1 Video power supply Ref. 789/5BN. 1 Power supply (2) Ref. 789/3N. 1 Video distributor Ref. 1794/4AN. 1 Power supply (1) Ref. 789/2

CONNECTION OF 4 VIDEO DOOR PHONES TO 1 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATIONThe video outdoor station calls the 4 video door phones

in parallel with concurrent power-on

12+coax

10+coax

7+coax

2

7+coax

7+coax

7+coax

9+coax

8+coax

TC

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

CONNECTION OF 4 VIDEO DOOR PHONES TO 1 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATIONThe video outdoor station calls the 4 video door phones

in parallel with concurrent power-on

SV102-2066D

(VX.008)

(VX.008)

(VX.008)

3

4

ADDITIONAL POWERSUPPLY UNIT (2)

ADDITIONAL POWERSUPPLY UNIT (1)

(VX.007)

(VD.002)

(C4.007)(C4.008)

(C4.006)

2

1

(VX.025)

+6-6~0

R1

R1R2

+TC

R2

AP

1/~

~12

SE1+R

SE2

~

~

PS

SE3

R1R2

RT

V4V5V3

CA

1

10

69

2

R3Y2Y1X2X1

R1R2

RT

V4V5V3

CA

1

10

69

2

R3Y2Y1X2X1

TC

R1R2

RT

V4V5V3

CA

1

10

69

2

R3Y2Y1X2X1

in

RL

R1R2

R2 outR1

~

~

L

+

2-

1A

1

U1G/T ~12

~0~12

G/T~0

~0~12

V5

+TCR1

V3

U2 U1

E

R2R1

R1RT

R2

V4V5V3

CA

1

10

69

2

R3Y2Y1X2X1

in

RL

R1R2

~

R2 outR1

~

LINE~

LINE~

VIDEOPOWER SUPPLYVIDEO

DISTRIBUTOR

LINE~

ELECTRIC LOCK

Lock Release

Name taglighting

DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)C4.006Sinthesi models only:Connect jumper L with G/T

VX.003 VX.008 VX.023 VX.025

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONESTO 1 OUTDOOR STATION EQUIPPED WITH A SEPARATE CCD TV CAMERA

Possibility of automatic connection by the video door phones to the TV camera

FUNCTION

This system allows connection between the video outdoor station and the various video door phones situated in the apartments. When the visitor presses a button on the push button panel, the bitonal electronic call is sent to the corresponding video door phone loudspeaker and, after about 7 seconds, the image appears on the screen. At this point the user sees the visitor and can answer, if he wishes, unhooking the handset. At the end of the conversation, the electric lock can be operated by pressing the key . Vision of the image lasts about 60 seconds, after which the intervention of the built-in timer in the power supply causes it to go off. If a second video door phone is called before the end of the 60 seconds, the fi rst video door phone will automatically go off and the latter comes on. This feature guarantees secrecy of vision. Press button on the video door phone to switch on the camera also without having received a call.

EQUIPMENT

The following devices are needed for the system illustrated in diagram SV102-3118C:


BLACK/WHITE


or


COLOUR


or

Utopia modelN. X Video door phones direct vision Ref. 1703/1N. X Bracket Ref. 1704/90




or

K-Steel modelN. X Button modules Ref. 1155/11-/12A-/13A-/14AN. 1 Module with door unit Ref. 1155/20-/21-/22A


or

725 modelN. 1 Panels with N buttons Mod. 725N. 1 Amplifi ed door unit Ref. 1128/500


or




N. 1 Video power supply Ref. 789/5BN. 1 Relay box Ref. 788/52N. 1 Video distributor Ref. 1794/4A

DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)


C4.007 C4.008VX.003 VX.008VX.010 VX.011VX.012 VX.014

7+n+coax

9

2

2+coax

7+(n-1)+coax

8

8

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONESTO 1 OUTDOOR STATION EQUIPPED WITH A SEPARATE CCD TV CAMERA

Possibility of automatic connection by the video door phones to the TV camera

SV102-3118C

(VX.008)


(VX.014)

(VX.011)

(C4.006)

(VX.012)

(VX.010)

LINE ~

(C4.008)(C4.007)

SEE DIAGRAMSV102-3229pag.51

U2U3U4

U1

~12

~0~12

G/T~0

G/T

(R1)(+TC)

Coax

U2U3U4

U1

~12

~0~12

G/T~0

G/T

-

1

L

+

1A2

MAIN ~

TO THE FOLLOWING VIDEO DOOR PHONES

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

RELAYBOX

Lock Release

ELECTRIC LOCK

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

VIDEOPOWER SUPPLY

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


FUNCTION

This system is particularly suitable in one-family villas. The video door phone, besides being connected to a TV camera unit, can self-insert on a secondary control TV camera by pressing the service button .An internal closed TV circuit system is thus made, which allows the control of a room (i.e. children’s room) and the outside entrance at any time.The secondary TV camera is turned on for about a minute, after which it automatically turns off. In any case, a call from the video outdoor station automatically switches the video door phone to the external TV camera unit thus excluding the second TV camera; in order to reset the latter, it is suffi cient to press the service key when the conversation with the video outdoor station is over.With the other service key it is possible to self-insert also on the video outdoor station.

EQUIPMENT

The following devices are needed for the system illustrated in diagram SV102-3119A: VIDEO DOOR PHONE REFERENCES

BLACK/WHITE


or


COLOUR


or

Utopia modelN. 1 Video door phones direct vision Ref. 1703/1N. 1 Bracket Ref. 1704/90

or

Utopia free-hands modelN. 1 Video door phones direct vision Ref. 1703/2N. 1 Bracket Ref. 1704/91


TC

BLACK/WHITE



or



or



or



COLOUR



or

K-Steel modelN. 1 Module with camera and door unit Ref. 1755/40N. 1 Module with door unit Ref. 1155/21



N. 1 Video power supply Ref. 789/5BN. 1 Relay Ref. 788/51

9+coax

12+coax

2

2+coax

TC

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


SV102-3119A

(VX.014)

(VX.008)

(C4.006)

TRANSFORMER

SEE DIAGRAMSV102-3229pag.51

~0~12G/T

U1

L

1A2

1

+-

~

~0~12

~

~

R1

R1

SE2

PS

SE1

+6-6

R2

AP

~12

+R

~0

+TC

R21/~SE3

~

6

1

~12

3

2

8

12

10

C2

C195

4

713

SN2SN114

15

~0

11

1

X1

Y2

X2

CA

962

R3

10

Y1

V4V5V3

R1R2

Coax (R1)(+TC)

R1+TCV5V3

~12~0

MAIN ~

(VD.002)

TC

LINE ~

ELECTRIC LOCK

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

VIDEOPOWER SUPPLY

Lock Release

RELAY

DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)


VX.003 VX.008 VX.014

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONESTO 2 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATIONS

FUNCTION

This system allows the connection of a column of video door phones to 2 video outdoor stations with automatic switching.When a visitor presses a call button on one of the two push button panels, in the called apartment the bitonal electronic call is sent to the corresponding video door phone loudspeaker and the image appears on the screen after about 8 seconds.During this phase, the relay box automatically inserts the relative loudspeaking unit and TV camera, excluding the other video outdoor station from the service.At this point, the user sees the visitor and may respond, if desired, lifting the handset. At the end of the call, only the electric lock of the entrance concerned is activated pressing the key .If, during a conversation, a call is made from the other push button panel towards another video door phone, the fi rst will automatically switch off and the last video door phone called will be activated. It is not possible therefore to communicate with the 2 video outdoor stations at the same time in that they operate alternatively and are mutually exclusive.

EQUIPMENT




or



TC



or



or



or





6+coax+(n)

11+n+coax

6+coax+(n-2)

2

7+coax

7+coax

7+coax

6+coax+(n-1)

TC

11+n+coax

2

TC

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


SV102-2892D

(C4.006)

(C4.007)(C4.008)(C4.016)

(VD.002)(VD.002)

(C4.007)(C4.008)(C4.016)

(C4.006)

(VX.008)

VIDEOPOWER SUPPLY

(VX.010)(VX.011)

V4V5V3

CA

126

R3Y2Y1X2X1

910

R1R2

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12

U3

U1

U4

U2

G/T

U4

U2

G/T

U1

U3

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12

+1

L

~12~0

1A2-

R1+TC

V3V5

U4

U2

G/T

U1

U3

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12

U3

U1

U4

U2

G/T

U1

U2

ER1R2

+1

L

~12~0

1A2-

R1+TC

V3V5

LINE~

V4V5V3

CA

126

R3Y2Y1X2X1

910

R1R2

11 145

41315

6

SN2 SN1

C2

C1

8

3

12

1

10

79

~0~12

2

+6

-AP0

~ PSR1 R2 SE R1~ ~6

+1 12

~2SE

TC

V4V5V3

CA

126

R3Y2Y1X2X1

910

R1R2

TC TC

(VX.014)

~0~12

~

~MAIN~

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR


Name taglighting

ELECTRIC LOCK

Lock Release

ELECTRIC LOCK

Lock Release

RELAYBOX

Name taglighting

Name taglighting




DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)


C4.007 C4.008 C4.016 VD.002VX.003 VX.008 VX.010 VX.011 VX.014

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

FUNCTION

This type of system is used to connect a video door phone column to an automatically switching video door unit or door unit.A two-tone electronic call is sent to the corresponding video door phone speaker when a call button is pressed on either of the two panels; the picture appears on the screen after approximately seven seconds if the call was made by the video door unit.The video door phone will not light up and the video door phone will work as a normal door phone if the call is made from thcamera unit and panel. Press at the end of the call to open the concerned door electrical lock only.

EQUIPMENT




or



TC



or

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONE GROUPS TO 1 VIDEO DOOR UNIT AND 1 DOOR UNIT

6+coax+(n)

9+n

6+coax+(n-2)7+coax

7+coax

7+coax

6+coax+(n-1)

11+n+coax

TC



or



or






or

K-Steel modelN. X Button modules Ref. 1155/11-/12A-/13A-/14AN. 1 Module with door unit Ref. 1155/20-/21-/22A


or



or



BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONE GROUPS TO 1 VIDEO DOOR UNIT AND 1 DOOR UNIT

SV102-2934C

(VX.010)(VX.011)

(C4.016)

(C4.006)

(C4.008)(C4.007)

(C4.016)

(C4.006)

(C4.007)(C4.008)

(VD.002)

R1 ++- SEAP012

R2 PS~~6 6

~ ~2 TC

SE1

R1

145

41315

6

SN2 SN1

C2

C1

12 10

79

2

11

3

8

1

~0~12

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12

U3

U1

U4

U2

G/T

U1

U2

ER1R2

U4

U2

G/T

U1

U3

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12

V4V5V3

CA

126

R3Y2Y1X2X1

910

R1R2

TC

+1

L1A2-

V4V5V3

CA

126

R3Y2Y1X2X1

910

R1R2

V4V5V3

CA

126

R3Y2Y1X2X1

910

R1R2

+1

L

~12~0

1A2-

+TC

V5R1

V3

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12

U3

U1

U4

U2

G/T

U4

U2

G/T

U1

U3

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12

(VX.008)

(VX.014)

~0~12

~

~MAIN~

LINE ~


VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

Name taglighting



VIDEOPOWER SUPPLY

RELAYBOX


Lock Release Lock Release




DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)


C4.007 C4.008 C4.016 VD.002 VX.008 VX.010 VX.011VX.014

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


FUNCTION

This system allows the connection of a column of video door phones to 4 video outdoor stations with automatic switching. Therefore, it is suitable for a building with 4 entrances common to all apartments. When a visitor presses a call button on one of the two push button panels, in the called apartment the bitonal electronic call is sent to the corresponding video door phone loudspeaker and the image appears on the screen after about 7 seconds. During this phase, the relay box automatically inserts the relative loudspeaking unit and TV camera, excluding the other video outdoor station from the service. At this point, the user sees the visitor and may respond, if desired, lifting the handset. At the end of the call, only the electric lock of the entrance concerned is activated pressing the key . If, during a conversation, a call is made from the other push button panel towards another video door phone, the fi rst will automatically switch off and the last video door phone called will be activated. In this system it is not possible to speak simultaneously from the four outdoor stations because they work one at a time in automatic switching.

EQUIPMENT

The following devices are needed for the system illustrated in diagram SV102-3078B:



or



TC



or



or



or




N. 1 Video power supply Ref. 789/5BN. 1 Relay box Ref. 788/54

6+coax+(n)

6+coax+(n-2)7+coax

7+coax

7+coax

6+coax+(n-1)

11+n+coax

11+n+coax

TC

22 22

TC

11+n+coax

11+n+coax

TC

22 22

TC

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

(C4.007)(C4.008)

(C4.006)

(VX.008)

(VX.011)(VX.010)

(C4.016)

(C4.007)(C4.008)(C4.016)

(C4.008)(C4.007)

(C4.016)

(VD.002) (VD.002)

(VD.002)

(C4.006)

(C4.008)(C4.007)

(C4.016)

(VD.002)

(C4.006)

(C4.006)

(VX.014)

TC

V4V5V3

CA

126

R3Y2Y1X2X1

910

R1R2

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12

U3

U1

U4

U2

G/T

U4

U2

G/T

U1

U3

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12

~0~12

~

~

+1

L

~12~0

1A2

V5

-

V3R1+TC

9 6 2 1R1R2 V3V5

V3V5

R1+TC

V3V5

R1+TC

SESE~0~0

~12~12

+6-621

21

-6+6

SN1 SN4

V3V5

R1+TC +TC

R1

V5V3

AP -6 +6~A ~B~12 SE +TC R1 R2

SE SE

C2C1 C3 C4

~0 ~0~12 ~12

+6-621

SN2

21

-6

SN3

+6

-6U-6I

V4V5V3

CA

126

R3Y2Y1X2X1

910

R1R2

TC

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12

U3

U1

U4

U2

G/T

V4V5V3

CA

126

R3Y2Y1X2X1

910

R1R2

U4

U2

G/T

U1

U3

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12

+1

L

~12~0

1A2

V5

-

V3R1

+TC

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12

U3

U1

U4

U2

G/T

~ SE1 +6 R1 R2 PS~ ~12 +TC-6SE2~0 AP

U4

U2

G/T

U1

U3

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12

TC

+1

L

~12~0

1A2

V5

-

V3R1+TC

U4

U2

G/T

U1

U3

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12

TC

+1

L

~12~0

1A2

V5

-

V3R1

+TC

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12

U3

U1

U4

U2

G/T


RELAYBOX

COLUMN

INPUT B INPUT C


Name taglighting

ELECTRIC LOCK

Lock Release

INPUT A


Name taglighting

ELECTRIC LOCK

Lock Release VOLTAGE

INPUT D

VIDEOPOWER SUPPLY

LINE~

Name taglighting

ELECTRIC LOCK

Lock Release



Name taglighting


Name taglighting

ELECTRIC LOCK

Lock Release

LINE~


SV102-3078B

DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)



BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONE COLUMNSTO A MAIN VIDEO OUTDOOR STATION

Each column is connected to 1 proper secondary video outdoor station


6+coax+(n-1)7+coax

7+coax

6+coax+(n)

10+coax+K(n+1)

8+n+coax

TC

2 2

TC

6+coax+(n-1) 7+coax

7+coax

6+coax+(n)

8+n+coax

TC

2

FUNCTION

This system is particularly suitable for residential properties where it is necessary to connect the single villas to a proper video outdoor station and to a common one located at the main entry.

During calling the video door phone is automatically switched on the main video outdoor station or to the secondary one of its own group, by means of the switching relay. The services for secondary video outdoor stations are independent, so that they be realized simultaneously. When the call is coming from the main video outdoor station, only the group of the called video door phone is switched on it, the other ones continue to service towards the secondary.

EQUIPMENT

The following devices are needed for the system illustrated in diagram SV102-3079A:



or



TC

Sinthesi modelN. X Button modules Ref. 1145/11-/12-/13-/14N. K+1 Module with camera and door unit Ref. 1745/80-/81-/82


or

K-Steel modelN. X Button modules Ref. 1155/11-/12A-/13A-/14AN. K+1 Module with camera and door unit Ref. 1755/80


or

725 model N. K+1 Panel with N buttons Mod. 725N. K+1 Amplifi ed door unit Ref. 1128/500N. K+1 Camera Ref. 725/600N. K+1 Front plate Ref. 725/601-/602


or

1128 model N. K+1 Front case for video door unit Ref. 1728/20-/21N. K+1 Door unit with camera Ref. 1728/80N. X Front case Ref. 1128/10-/11N. X Button Ref. 1128/1-/2



N. K+1 Video power supply Ref. 789/5BN. K+1 Relay box Ref. 788/51>1 Video distributor Ref. 1794/4A

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONE COLUMNSTO A MAIN VIDEO OUTDOOR STATION

Each column is connected to 1 proper secondary video outdoor station

SV102-3079A

(VX.011)(VX.010)

(C4.006)

(VX.008)

(VX.014)

(C4.008)(C4.007)

(C4.017)

(VD.002)

7

Coax

Coax

SN1

SN1

4-6

13C1

R1

R1

4

1

6

1

7-

13C1

(C4.007)(C4.008)(C4.017)

(VD.002)

(VX.008)(VX.002)

~ R16

~R2 12SEPSAP R1TC

~0~

1-

6+ +

2SE

U4

U2

G/T

U1

U3

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12U3

U1

U4

U2

G/T

U4

U2

G/T

U1

U3

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12U3

U1

U4

U2

G/T

~ SE~ AP6 0

R1R2PS+R1~ 12 2 TC+ -6

~1SE

+TC

+

R1

1

L

~12~0

1A2

V5

-

V3

TC

TC

TC

+TC

+

R1

1

L

~12~0

1A2

V5

-

V3

U4

U2

G/T

U1

U3

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12

SN1 SN2

8

7

10

C1

14

4 61 3

2511

12051~~

C29

1312

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12U3

U1

U4

U2

G/T

~0~12

~

~LINE~

R1R2

V4V5V3

CA

126

R3Y2Y1X2X1

910

R1R2

V4V5V3

CA

126

R3Y2Y1X2X1

910

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12

U3

U1

U4

U2

G/T

U4

U2

G/T

U1

U3

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12

U1 U2

U3

E

U4

U5

R1R2

1st COLUMN 2nd COLUMN

RELAYBOX



CONNECTION AS 1ST GROUP

LINE ~

LINE ~

ELECTRIC LOCK

ELECTRIC LOCK

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

VIDEOPOWER SUPPLY

VIDEOPOWER SUPPLY

Lock Release

Lock Release

Calls

Common

TO THE FOLLOWING COLUMN


DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)



BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONE COLUMNSTO 1 MAIN VIDEO OUTDOOR STATION

Each columns is also connected to its ownsecondary outdoor station

FUNCTION

This system is particularly suitable for residential properties where it is necessary to connect the single villas to an own video outdoor station and to a common one located at the main entry.

During calling the interested video door phone is automatically swItched on the main video outdoor station or to the secondary one of its own group, by means of the switching relay. The services for secondary outdoor stations are independent, so that they can be realizedsimultaneously. When the call is coming from the main video outdoor station, only the group of the called video door phone is switched on it, the other ones continue to service the secondary.

EQUIPMENT




or



TC



or



or



or






or

K-Steel modelN. X Button modules Ref. 1155/11-/12A-/13A-/14AN. K+1 Module with door unit Ref. 1155/20-/21-/22A


or

725 modelN. K+1 Panels with N buttons Mod. 725N. K+1 Amplifi ed door unit Ref. 1128/500


or



K= number of columns

6+n+coax

7+coax

7+coax

6+n+coax

10+coax+K(n+1)

8+n+coax

2

9+n

TC

6+n+coax

7+coax

7+coax

6+n+coax

8+n+coax

8+n+coax 9+n

2

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONE COLUMNSTO 1 MAIN VIDEO OUTDOOR STATION

Each columns is also connected to its ownsecondary outdoor station

SV102-2935E

Coax

Coax

Coax

14-67

SN1

13C1

R1

(C4.008)

(C4.006)

(C4.007)

(VX.008)

USER

(VX.001)

C1Coax

41

-67

13R1

SN1

(VX.008)(VX.002)

(C4.017)

(C4.017)

(VD.002)

A

A

(VX.014)

(C4.007)(C4.008)

(VX.001)

A

LINE ~

U4

U2

G/T

U1

U3

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12

~6126

~PS~0

- ~ +

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12U3

U1

U4

U2

G/T

U4

U2

G/T

U1

U3

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12U3

U1

U4

U2

G/T

+1

L1A2-

U4

U2

G/T

U1

U3

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12

U3

U1

U4

U2

G/T

3

SN2

8 25

61

SN1

14

4

7

C2~ ~

9

1015

210

13C11112

R1R2

V4V5V3

CA

126

R3Y2Y1X2X1

910

R1R2

E U1 U2

U5 U4 U3

~0~12

~

~

~ SE~ AP6 0

R1R2PS+R1~ 12 2 TC+ -6

~1SE

LINE~

R1R2

V4V5V3

CA

126

R3Y2Y1X2X1

910

TC

12 2 S3S1~

+TC

+

R1

1

L

~12~0

1A2

V5

-

V3

U4

U2

G/T

U1

U3

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12

G/T

~0~0

~12

~12U3

U1

U4

U2

G/T

U1 U2

U3

E

U4

U5

R1R2

Calls

Common

TO THEFOLLOWINGCOLUMN


AS USER

AS USER

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR



RELAYBOX

ELECTRIC LOCK

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

Name taglighting


LockRelease

ELECTRIC LOCK

LockRelease


PHONE SYSTEM

POWER SUPPLYFOR VIDEO DOORPHONE SYSTEM

LINE ~

CALLREPEATERRELAY

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR



N. 1 Video power supply Ref. 789/5BN. K Door phone power supply Ref. 786/11N. K Relay box Ref. 788/51N. K Call repeater relay Ref. 788/52>1 Video distributor Ref. 1794/4A

DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)


C4.007 C4.008 VD.002 VX.001VX.002 VX.008 VX.014 VX.034

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

CONNECTION OF 3 INTERCOM VIDEO DOOR PHONES WITH POSSIBILITY OF ANSWERING CALLS FROM 1 ELECTRICAL VIDEO DOOR UNIT

Single call from outside with concurrent power-on

FUNCTION

This system is particularly suited for detached houses where the video door phones provide the intercom service and can also be called at the same time in parallel by the video outdoor station. Switching from one service to another is automatic and is assured during the call phase by a relay device.

When the intercom service is activated, listening to the conversation from the loudspeaking unit of the video outdoor station is excluded.If a call is made from the video outdoor station during an intercom conversation, all the video door phones are automatically switched to the outside.

Extra buzzers are used for intercom calls; for external calls from the video outdoor station, the two-tone electronic call is sent to the loudspeaker of the handset of the video door phone concerned.The and service keys are used for intercom calls. When the video door phones are called in parallel by the video outdoor station, they switch on at the same time. At the end of the conversation, the electric lock is released pressing the key .Viewing lasts approximately 60 seconds, after which it is interrupted automatically following tripping of the timer incorporate in the power supply.

EQUIPMENT




or



TC



or



or



or




N. 1 Video power supply Ref. 789/5BN. 1 Power supply Ref. 789/3N. 1 Impedance generator Ref. 789/51N. 1 Video distributor Ref. 1794/4AN. 3 Extra Buzzer Ref. 9854/52N. 1 Kit of 10 diodes Ref. 1131/4N. 1 Relay box Ref. 788/51

12+2coax

10+coax

12+coax

2

12+coax

12+coax

12+coax

TC

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

CONNECTION OF 3 INTERCOM VIDEO DOOR PHONES WITH POSSIBILITY OF ANSWERING CALLS FROM 1 ELECTRICAL VIDEO DOOR UNIT


SV102-2970D

(VX.021)

(VX.007)

(C4.014)

1

2

(VX.006)

3

(C4.006)

(VX.008)

(VD.002)

(VX.021)(VX.006)(C4.014)

(VX.021)(VX.006)(C4.014)

(VX.008)

LINE~

6 60121SE ~ ~ -+

PS+TC

SE2

1/~R+

R2APR1

R1R2~ ~ 6 J

- -

473W

473W

R75

R75

U2 U1

R1R2

E

TC

8

97

15

2~012

~C2 11C1

6

SN2SN1

3 1145

10

12

413

Alt

Mic

CA

1

26

109

R3Y2Y1X2X1

R2R1

V3V5V4

BUZZER

RT

-/~+/~

Alt

Mic

CA

1

26

109

R3Y2Y1X2X1

RTR1

V3V5V4

BUZZER

R2

-/~+/~

R2 R1 R2in out

~~

Alt

Mic

CA

1

26

109

R3Y2Y1X2X1

RTR1

V3V5V4

BUZZER

R2

-/~+/~

473W

R1

V3+TC

V5

L

~0~12

-

2+

1A

1

G/T~12~0G/T

~0

U1

~12

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

POWERSUPPLY

LINE ~

IMPEDANCEGENERATOR

POWERSUPPLY

RELAYBOX

ELECTRIC LOCK

Lock Release

Name taglighting

DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.014 VX.003 VX.006 VX.007 VX.008


BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

CONNECTION OF MAXIMUM 9 INTERCOM Atlantico VIDEO DOOR PHONES WITH POSSIBILITY OF ANSWERING CALLS FROM 1 ELECTRICAL VIDEO DOOR UNIT

Single call from the outside with concurrent power-on

FUNCTION

This system is particularly suited for detached houses where the video door phones provide the intercom service and can also be called at the same time in parallel by the video outdoor station.

Switching from one service to another is automatic and is assured during the call phase by a relay device.When the intercom service is activate, listening to the conversation from the loudspeaking unit of the video outdoor station is excluded.If a call is made from the video outdoor station during an intercom conversation, all the video door phones are automatically switched to the outside.

Extra buzzers are used for external calls from the video outdoor station; for intercom calls, the two-tone electronic call is sent to the loudspeaker of the handset of the video door phone concerned.When the video door phones are called in parallel by the video outdoor station, they switch on at the same time. At the end of the conversation, the electric lock is released pressing the key .Viewing lasts approximately 60 seconds, after which it is interrupted automatically following tripping of the timer incorporate in the power supply.

EQUIPMENT



Atlantico modelN. 9 Video door phone Ref. 1702/1N. 9 Bracket with 8 Button add-on Ref. 1702/86


TC



or



or



or



VARIOUS

N. 1 Video power supply Ref. 789/5BN. 1 Power supply (2) Ref. 789/2N. 2 Power supply (1) Ref. 789/3N. 1 Impedance generator Ref. 789/51N. 1 Relay box Ref. 788/51N. 1 Call repeater relay Ref. 788/52N. 1 Video distributor Ref. 1794/4AN. 9 Extra Buzzer Ref. 9854/52N. 1 Kit of 10 diodes Ref. 1131/4

DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.014 VD.002 VX.001 VX.003 VX.006 VX.007 VX.008


19+coax

12+coax

19+coax

"9"

"8"

"3"

"1"

"2"

2

19+coax

20+coax

25+coax

TC

25+coax

19+coax

19+coax

23+coax

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

CONNECTION OF MAXIMUM 9 INTERCOM Atlantico VIDEO DOOR PHONES WITH POSSIBILITY OF ANSWERING CALLS FROM 1 ELECTRICAL VIDEO DOOR UNIT

Single call from the outside with concurrent power-on

SV102-2972D

1

2

3

4 - 5 R1RD

(VX.007)

(VD.002)

(C4.006)

8

9

POWERSUPPLY (2)

POWERSUPPLY(1)

POWERSUPPLY(1)

(C4.014)(VX.006)(VX.021)

(C4.014)

(VX.021)(VX.006)

(VX.021)(VX.006)(C4.014)

(VX.006)(C4.014)

(VX.021)

TO THEVIDEO

DOOR PHONES

TO THEVIDEO

DOOR PHONES

6 - 7

(VX.007)

(C4.014)(VX.006)(VX.021)

R1RD

(VX.001)

(VX.008)

(VX.008)

(VX.008)

(VX.008)

R2 R1

LINE~

R2in out~ ~

CA

1

26

109

R3Y2Y1X2X1

R2R1RD

V3V5V4

T2T3

T4T5T6

T1G/T

-/~+/~

G/T2

S112~2S36 J

- -

CA

1

26

109

R3Y2Y1X2X1

RDR1R2

V3V5V4

T2T3

T4T5T6

T1G/T

-/~+/~

G/T2

LINE~

660121SE ~ ~- +

PS+TC

SE2

1/~

APR1

R1 R2~ ~

R2 R1

LINE~

R2in out~ ~

R75

TC

473W

CA

1

26

109

R3Y2Y1X2X1

R2R1RD

V3V5V4

T2T3

T4T5T6

T1G/T

-/~+/~

G/T2

21A

L

~12~0

1+

V5

-

V3

~0~0

~12

~12

U1G/T

+TCR1

R75

U4 U3

R1R2

U2 U1

E

U5

R75

R2 R1

LINE~

R2in out~ ~

CA

1

26

109

R3Y2Y1X2X1

RDR1R2

V3V5V4

T2T3

T4T5T6

T1G/T

-/~+/~

G/T2

CA

1

26

109

R3Y2Y1X2X1

RDR1R2

V3V5V4

T2T3

T4T5T6

T1G/T

-/~+/~

G/T2

87

152~012

~C1 116

SN2SN1

133

4

145

10

C2

1

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

POWERSUPPLY

CALLREPEATERRELAY

IMPEDANCEGENERATOR

RELAYBOX

LockRelease

ELECTRICLOCK

Name taglighting

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

CONNECTION OF 3 INTERCOM Atlantico VIDEO DOOR PHONES WITH POSSIBILITY OF ANSWERING CALLS FROM 2 ELECTRICAL VIDEO DOOR UNITSThe video outdoor stations call the video door phones in parallel with concurrent

power-on

FUNCTION

The 3 video door phones perform the intercom service and can be called at the same time in parallel by one of the two video outdoor stations.Switching to the three services is automatic and is assured during the call phase by a relay device.

When the intercom service is activated, listening to the conversation from the loudspeaking units of the video outdoor stations is excluded.If a call is made from the one of the two video outdoor stations during an intercom conversation, all the video door phones are automatically switched to the entrance from which the call has been sent. Therefore, concurrent communication with the 2 video outdoor stations is not possible in that either one or the other of these operates alternatively, in mutual exclusion.

Extra buzzers are used for the intercom calls while for those of the video outdoor stations, the two-tone electronic call is sent to the loudspeaker of the handset of the video door phone concerned.When the video door phones are called in parallel by the one of the two video outdoor stations, they switch on at the same time. At the end ofthe conversation, only the electric lock of the entrance concerned is released pressing the key .Viewing lasts approximately 60 seconds, after which it is interrupted automatically following tripping of the timer incorporate in the power supply.

EQUIPMENT





TC



or



or



or

1128 model N. 2 Front case for video door unit Ref. 1728/20-/21N. 2 Door unit with camera Ref. 1728/80N. 2 Button Ref. 1128/1-/2N. X Blank module (*) Ref. 1128/30-/31




N. 1 Video power supply Ref. 789/5BN. 1 Supplementary power supply Ref. 789/2N. 1 Impedance generator Ref. 789/51N. 1 Relay box (1) Ref. 788/54N. 1 Relay box (2) Ref. 788/52N. 1 Video distributor Ref. 1794/4AN. 3 Extra Buzzer Ref. 9854/52N. 1 Kit of 10 diodes Ref. 1131/4

12+coax

11+coax

2

TC

12+coax

2

TC

13+coax

11+coax

12+coax

11+coax

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

CONNECTION OF 3 INTERCOM Atlantico VIDEO DOOR PHONES WITH POSSIBILITY OF ANSWERING CALLS FROM 2 ELECTRICAL VIDEO DOOR UNITSThe video outdoor stations call the video door phones in parallel with concurrent

power-on

SV102-3257A

(VX.021)

(VX.008)

(VX.006)

(C4.006)

(C4.006)

(VX.021)

(VX.006)(VX.021)

(C4.014)

(VX.006)(C4.014)

(C4.014)

(VX.008)

(C4.016)

(C4.016)

(VD.002)

(VD.002)

AP +TC R1SE1~~ ~0 ~12 -6 SE2 +6 PS R2

BUZZER -/~+/~

473W

473W

9 6 2 1R1 R2 V3V5

SN2

+6-621

V3V5

R1+TC

SE

21

-6+6

+TCR1

V5V3

AP -6 +6DH

I GNN

~0 ~A ~B ~12 SE R1

SE

SN4

~12~0

SN3

2

+6

1

-6

~12~0

V5

+TC

V3R1

~12~0

SE

~12~0

R1V3

+6

V5

-6

+TC

2

SE

SN1

1

+TC -6U-6IR2C1 C2 C3 C4

BUZZER -/~+/~

TC

CA

126

R3Y2Y1X2X1

RD

V4V5V3

109

R1

RL

230

0

R2outR1

R2inR1

473W

TC

CA

126

R3Y2Y1X2X1

R2R1

V4V5V3

109

RD

R75

-6 -J

R75

L

+

2-

1A

1

U1G/T~12

~0~12

G/T~0

~0~12 +TC

R1V3V5

U1

E

R1R2

U2

L

+

2-

1A

1

U1G/T~12

~0~12

G/T~0

~0~12 +TC

R1V3V5

CA

126

R3Y2Y1X2X1

RD

V4V5V3

109

R1

BUZZER -/~+/~

S1 S2 15 14

LINE ~

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

RELAYBOX(1)

COLUMN

ELECTRICLOCK

Lock Release

INPUT CINPUT B

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

ELECTRICLOCK

Lock Release

INPUT DINPUT A

VOLTAGE

LINE~

RELAYBOX(2)

IMPEDANCEGENERATOR

VIDEOPOWER SUPPLY

SUPPLEMENTARYPOWER SUPPLY

DIAGRAM NOTES (see section 1)


C4.014 C4.016VD.002 VX.003 VX.006 VX.008


BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

SV102-1469D

CA

R2R1

V4V5

1

109X1X2Y1Y2R3

26

calls6 29R1 COAXR2 1

CA6

V3

S3S1

~ ~0

~ ~

~12~0

12

12V~RELE'

Ref.788/52

RISING COLUMN

CHIME


LINE~

(VX.008)

CA

1

10

26

9

calls6 29R1 COAXR2 1

RISINGCOLUMN

V3

CA

R2R1

V4V5

1

109X1X2Y1Y2R3

26

SV102-1574C

SV102-1469D: CONNECTION OF A CALL REPEATER RELAY IN PARALLELTO THE VIDEO DOOR PHONE

SV102-1574C: CONNECTION IN PARALLEL OF 1 VIDEO DOOR PHONE AND 1 DOOR PHONE

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

CONNECTION OF A CALL REPEATER RELAY IN PARALLELTO THE VIDEO DOOR PHONE

SV102-0782D

R2 R1 R2outin

CA

RTR1

V4V5V3

1

109X1X2Y1Y2R3

26

CA

R2R1

V4V5V3

1

109X1X2Y1Y2R3

26

RT

~~

621

9

R2R1

COAX

COAX

LINE ~

Calls

POWER SUPPLYRef.789/2

FROMRISINGCOLUMN

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

FUNCTION

The system is particularly suitable to be installed in buildings where three video door phones belonging to a more complex system with video door phone unit must be called and switched on at the same time by one only call button. Since the video power unit cannot power more than one video door phone, a supplementary local power unit is needed to power video door phones 2 and 3.

EQUIPMENT




or



N. 1 Supplementary power supply Ref. 789/3N. 1 Video distributor Ref. 1794/4AN. 1 Door phone power supply Ref. 786/11N. 1 Relay Ref. 788/52

DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

VX.001 VX.007 VX.008

CONNECTION OF 3 VIDEO DOOR PHONE EXTENSIONS IN PARALLEL TO A SYSTEM WITH VIDEO DOOR UNIT

The video door phones are called at the same time

7+2coax

7+2coax

10+2coax

7+coax

7+coax

8+2coax

FROM RISINGCOLUMN

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

SV102-2132E

CONNECTION OF 3 VIDEO DOOR PHONE EXTENSIONS IN PARALLEL TO A SYSTEM WITH VIDEO DOOR UNIT

The video door phones are called at the same time

(VX.008)

(VX.001)

CA

R2R1

V4V5V3

1

109

X1X2Y1Y2R3

26

RT

R2 R1 R2outin

~~

CA

RTR1

V4V5V3

1

109

X1X2Y1Y2R3

26

R2

CA

RTR1

V4V5V3

1

109

X1X2Y1Y2R3

26

R2

R1R2

U1U2

U5

E

~

0~12

~0

~~12

PS

LINE~

~S1

6CA

621

9

COAX

R2R1

COAX

S3

473W

LINE~


VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

calls

FROMRISINGCOLUMN

RELAY


BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

CONNECTION OF 3 INTERCOM VIDEO DOOR PHONE EXTENSIONS TO A SYSTEM WITH VIDEO DOOR UNIT


FUNCTION


When the intercom service is activated, listening to the conversation from the loudspeaking unit of the video outdoor station is excluded.

The external call from the video door phone system is sent to the video door phone speaker. The intercom call is sent to the buzzers.The and service keys are used for intercom calls. When the video door phones are called in parallel by the video outdoor station, they switch on at the same time. At the end of the conversation, the electric lock is released pressing the key .Viewing lasts approximately 60 seconds, after which it is interrupted automatically following tripping of the timer incorporate in the power supply.

EQUIPMENT




or



N. 1 Power supply Ref. 786/11N. 1 Supplementary power supply Ref. 789/3N. 1 Video distributor Ref. 1794/4AN. 3 Extra Buzzer Ref. 9854/52N. 1 Kit of 10 diodes Ref. 1131/4N. 1 Relay box “B” Ref. 788/52N. 1 Relay box “A” Ref. 788/51

DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.014 VX.006 VX.007 VX.008


VX.023 VX.034

12+2coax

7+2coax

FROM RISINGCOLUMN

11+coax

11+coax

12+2coax

12+2coax

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

SV102-1349E

CONNECTION OF 3 INTERCOM VIDEO DOOR PHONE EXTENSIONS TO A SYSTEM WITH VIDEO DOOR UNIT


(VX.006)(VX.021)

(VX.007)

-/+/

-/+/

-/+/

(C4.014)

(C4.014)(VX.021)(VX.006)

(C4.014)(VX.021)(VX.006)

LINE~

FROMRISINGCOLUMN


MAIN~

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

RELAYBOX (B)

RELAYBOX (A)

POWER SUPPLY

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

CONNECTION OF N VIDEO DOOR PHONES TO 1 VIDEO DOOR UNITDistance between video door phone and video door unit in the range from 300 to

1000 metres

FUNCTION

The system allows the connection between the video door phone unit and the various video door phones located in the apartments also when the distance between them is higher than 300 m and lower than 1000m. When the visitor presses a button on the push button panel, the bitonal electronic call is sent to the corresponding video door phone loudspeaker and, after about 7 seconds, the image appears on the screen. At this point the user sees the visitor and can answer, if he wishes, unhooking the handset. At the end of the conversation, the electric lock can be operated by pressing the key ( ).Vision of the image lasts about 60 seconds, after which the intervention of the built-in timer in the power supply causes it to go off. If a second video door phone is called before the end of the 60 seconds, the fi rst video door phone will automatically go off and the latter comes on. This feature guarantees secrecy of vision.

EQUIPMENT




or



TC



or



or



or




N. 1 Video power supply Ref. 789/5BN. X Supplementary power supply Ref. 789/2N. 1 Video amplifi er Ref. 1090/729

6+(n-2)+coax

6+n+coax

>300m<1000m

9+n+coax

6+(n-1)+coax

2

7+coax

7+coax

TC

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

CONNECTION OF N VIDEO DOOR PHONES TO 1 VIDEO DOOR UNITDistance between video door phone and video door unit in the range from 300 to

1000 metres

SV102-1241D

(VX.008)

(VX.008)

(VX.010)(VX.011)

(C4.007)(C4.008)

(VX.008)

(C4.006)

RL

230

0

R2outR1

R1R2in

LINE~

LINE~

LINE~(VX.008)

RL

230

0

R2outR1

R1R2in

LINE~(VX.008)

TC

INOUT

(VD.002)

R2R1

V4V5V3

CA

126

R3Y2Y1X2X1

910

R2R1

V4V5V3

CA

126

R3Y2Y1X2X1

910

U4

U2

G/T~0

~12

~0~12U1

U3

G/T

L

~0~12

+

2-

1A

1

+TCR1

V3V5

0

230

PS

+R1/~

-6~0AP

R1

+6R2R2

+TCR1

SE1SE2

~12



Name taglighting

VIDEOPOWER SUPPLY

ELECTRICLOCK

LockRelease

VIDEO AMPLIFIER



DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)


C4.007 C4.008VD.002 VX.008 VX.010 VX.011 VX.016

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


FUNCTION


EQUIPMENT




or

Utopia modelN. X Video door phones direct vision Ref. 1703/1N. X Bracket Ref. 1703/90


TC

Sinthesi modelN. 1 Module camera Ref. 1745/40N. 1 Module with door unit Ref. 1145/20-/21-/22N. 1 Amplifi ed door unit Ref. 5150/500N. X Button modules Ref. 1145/11-/12-/13-/14


or

K-Steel modelN. 1 Module camera Ref. 1755/40N. 1 Module with door unit Ref. 1155/20-/21-/22AN. X Button modules Ref. 1155/11-/12A-/13A-/14A




DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)


C4.007 C4.008 VD.002 VX.003VX.008 VX.010 VX.011

6+(n-2)+coax

6+n+coax

9+n+coax

6+(n-1)+coax

2

7+coax

7+coax

TC

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


SV102-3063A

(C4.007)(C4.008)

(VD.002)

VIDEOPOWERSUPPLY

(VX.010)(VX.011)

(VX.008)

(C4.006)

R1R2

U2

U1

E

~0~12

V3V5

+TCR1

L

+

2-

1A

1

U1G/T

U2

~12

~0~12

G/T~0

G/T~0~12

~0~12

U2U1 G/T

U3U4

R1R2

V4V5V3

CA126

R3Y2Y1X2X1

910

R1R2

V4V5V3

CA126

R3Y2Y1X2X1

910

R1R1

+TC

R2

AP

+6-6~0

SE2

~

~

PS

R2

1/~

SE1+R

~12

TC



VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

LINE~

ELECTRICLOCK

Lock Release

Name taglighting

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONES TO 1 DOOR UNIT Door open indicator on video door phones

FUNCTION

The system provides an open door monitoring service, in addition to providing a connection between the video door unit and the various colour video door phone in the apartments following a call.An indicator LED lights up on all video door phones when the entrance door is open.

EQUIPMENT



EXAMPLE “A”Utopia modelN. 1 Video door phones direct vision Ref. 1703/1N. 1 Bracket Ref. 1704/90

or

EXAMPLE “B”Atlantico modelN. 1 Video door phones Ref. 1702/40N. 1 Bracket Ref. 1702/86



TC



or




N. 1 Video power supply Ref. 789/5BN. 1 Supplementary power supply Ref. 1090/850N. 1 Relay box Ref. 788/52

DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)


C4.007 C4.008 VD.002VX.003 VX.006 VX.008 VX.010VX.011 VX.012 VX.014 VX.015

NOTE *: add 1 optional conductor for the video door phone autoinsertion (with the Utopia free-hands video door phone is possible also the fonic autoinsertion).

13+n+coax

8+n+coax(NOTE *)

8+n+coax(NOTE *)

"B"

"A"

4

10+coax

10+coax

10+coax

TC

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONES TO 1 DOOR UNIT Door open indicator on video door phones

SV102-3228

(VX.006)

(VX.008)(VX.015)

"A"

"B"

(C4.007) (C4.008)POWER SUPPLY

DOOR OPENNORMALLY OPEN CONTACT

(VX.008)

(VX.011)

(VX.012)BOXRELAY

NOTA *

NOTE * NOTE *

(VX.014)

(VX.010)

(C4.006)

2-

1A

+

L

1

~12~0

R1+TC

V5V3

R2R1

CA

126910

Y2Y1X2X1+AP

V3

V4V5

R3

15 S2S114

1/~

SE2SE3

~

~

+TC

PS

SE1

~0AP

R1

-6

~12

+6

+R

R2

R2R1

~

~0~12

~

TC

6

X1

CA

T6

Y1V4

R3

V5

R2

X2

9

1R1

2

10

Y2V3

////

G/TT1

+APR

0

230

GND+12P1

P2

R2R1

CA

126910

Y2Y1X2X1+AP

V3

V4V5

R3

U2U3U4

U1

~12

~0~12

G/T~0

G/T

LINE~

(VD.002)

LINE ~

U2U3U4

U1

~12

~0~12

G/T~0

G/T


VIDEOPOWER SUPPLY

LINE~

ELECTRICLOCK

Lock Release

Name taglighting

Name taglighting


BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

FUNCTION

This type of system is used to connect a video door phone column to an automatically switching video door unit or door unit.A two-tone electronic call is sent to the corresponding video door phone speaker when a call button is pressed on either of the two panels; the picture appears on the screen after approximately seven seconds if the call was made by the video door unit.The video door phone monitor will be blank and will work as a regular free-hands door phone if the call is received from the door unit.Press at the end of the call to open the concerned door electrical lock only.

EQUIPMENT

The following devices are needed for the system illustrated in diagram SV102-3227:




TC



or

CONNECTION OF N FREE-HANDS UTOPIA COLOUR VIDEO DOOR PHONES TO 1 VIDEO DOOR UNIT AND TO 1 DOOR UNIT

9+n

6+coax+(n-1)

6+coax+(n-2)

6+coax+n

7+coax

7+coax

7+coax

11+n+coax

TC




Sinthesi modelN. 1 Button modules Ref. 1145/11-/12-/13-/14N. 1 Module with door unit set-up Ref. 1145/20-/21-/22N. 1 Amplifi ed door unit Ref. 1145/500


or

K-Steel modelN. 1 Button modules Ref. 1155/11-/12A-/13A-/14AN. 1 Module with door unit Ref. 1155/20-/21-/22A


or



or





DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)


C4.007 C4.008 C4.016 VD.002 VX.008 VX.010 VX.011VX.014

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

CONNECTION OF N FREE-HANDS UTOPIA COLOUR VIDEO DOOR PHONES TO 1 VIDEO DOOR UNIT AND TO 1 DOOR UNIT

SV102-3227

(VX.011)

(VX.008)

(C4.016)

(VX.010)

(C4.006)

(VX.014)


(C4.008)(C4.007)(C4.007) (C4.008)

(C4.006)

(C4.016)

BOXRELAY

MAIN ~

/~

1R1 SE-12 0~ ~ PS

2 TC6 16SEAP + +~ ~R2R1 R2 +

R

V5V3

V4

R2R1

Y2

X2

CA

962

R3

1

10X1

Y1

TC

(VD.002)

ER1R2

U2

U1

V5V3

V4

R2R1

Y2

X2

CA

962

R3

1

10X1

Y1

~

~0~12

~

V5V3

V4

R2R1

Y2

X2

CA

962

R3

1

10X1

Y1

~12~12

~0

G/TU4

U1U2

~0

G/T

U3U2U3U4

U1

~12

~0~12

G/T~0

G/T

145

C2

C12

11

3

8

1

~0~12

12 10

156

134

7

SN2 SN1

9

2-

1A

+

L

1

+TC

~12~0 V3

V5R1

U2U3U4

U1

~12

~0~12

G/T~0

G/T

~0G/T

~0~12~12 U3

U4

U1U2

G/T

LINE ~

L1A

-+

2

1


VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

VIDEOPOWER SUPPLY

ELECTRICLOCK

ELECTRICLOCK

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

Lock Release Lock Release

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

FUNCTION



EQUIPMENT





TC



or

CONNECTION OF N FREE-HANDS COLOUR VIDEO DOOR PHONE COLUMNS TO 1 MAIN VIDEO DOOR UNIT

Each column is additionally connected to a specifi c secondary door unit

6+n+coax

7+coax

7+coax

6+n+coax

10+coax+K(n+1)

8+n+coax

2

9+n

TC

6+n+coax

7+coax

7+coax

6+n+coax

8+n+coax

8+n+coax

9+n

2

K= number of columns




Sinthesi modelN. 1 Button modules Ref. 1145/11-/12-/13-/14N. 1 Module with door unit set-up Ref. 1145/20-/21-/22N. 1 Amplifi ed door unit Ref. 1145/500


or

K-Steel modelN. 1 Button modules Ref. 1155/11-/12A-/13A-/14AN. 1 Module with door unit Ref. 1155/20-/21-/22A


or



or




N. K+1 Video power supply Ref. 789/5BN. K Relay box Ref. 788/51N. 1 Video distributor Ref. 1794/4A

DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)



BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

CONNECTION OF N FREE-HANDS COLOUR VIDEO DOOR PHONE COLUMNS TO 1 MAIN VIDEO DOOR UNIT

Each column is additionally connected to a specifi c secondary door unit

SV102-3235

(C4.008)(C4.007)

(VX.008)

76

1

13

R1

4

Coax

(C4.006)

(VX.010)

(VX.011)

SN1

C1

VIDEOPOWER SUPPLY

-

13

(VX.008)

R1

-67

41

(VX.002)

SN1

C1

(VX.014)

(VX.014)

Coax(C4.008)(C4.007)

~12~12

~0

~0G/T

U1G/T

U2U3U4

~12~12

~0

~0G/T

U1G/T

U2U3U4

~~~~12

~0~12~12

G/T

~0

U2U3

G/TU1

U4

U2U3U4

U1

~12

~0~12

G/T~0

G/T

4

7

6

SN1

1 3

13

SN2

C1

8 2541

51 C~

20 90112 1~

1 21

~

TC

U1

U4

U2

U3

R2R1

E

1A

V5

+TC

~0

L+

R1

~12

-

V3

2

1

~0~12~12

G/T

~0

U2U3

G/TU1

U4

V4V5V3

CA

126

R3Y2Y1X2X1

910

R2R1

~12~12

~0

~0G/T

U1G/T

U2U3U4

~~~~12

LINE~

U2U3U4

U1

~12

~0~12

G/T~0

G/T

V4V5V3

CA

126

R3Y2Y1X2X1

910

R2R1

L1A

-+

2

1

LINE ~

(VD.002)

R2R1~~ 6+6-PAPS~0R2R1+ CT 2ESES ~ 21 1

LINE~

~~ 6 6-+ PA 1R R2PS+ CT S 1E~ 21E RS~ 10 2

~0~12~12

G/T

~0

U2U3

G/TU1

U4



RELAYBOX

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

ELECTRICLOCK

Lock Release


PHONE SYSTEMVIDEODISTRIBUTOR

Calls

Common

TO THE FOLLOWING

COLUMN

LINE

LockRelease

ELECTRIC LOCK



BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

CONNECTION OF 3 INTERCOM UTOPIA VIDEO DOOR PHONES WITH POSSIBILITY OF ANSWERING CALLS FROM 1 ELECTRICAL VIDEO DOOR UNIT

FUNCTION

This system is particularly suited for detached houses where the video door phones provide the intercom service and can also be called at the same time by the video outdoor station. Switching from one service to another is automatic and is assured during the call phase by a relay device.


The and service keys are used for intercom calls. When the video door phones are called in parallel by the video outdoor station, they switch on at the same time. At the end of the conversation, the electric lock is released pressing the key .Viewing lasts approximately 60 seconds, after which it is interrupted automatically following tripping of the timer incorporate in the power supply.

EQUIPMENT



Utopia modelN. 3 Video door phones Ref. 1703/1N. 3 Bracket Ref. 1703/90


TC

Sinthesi modelN. 1 Module with camera and door unit Ref. 1745/41N. 1 Button modules Ref. 1145/12


or

K-Steel modelN. 1 Module camera Ref. 1755/40N. 1 Module with door unit Ref. 1155/20N. X Button modules Ref. 1155/13A



N. 1 Video power supply Ref. 789/5BN. 1 Door phone power supply with relay Ref. 786/15

DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)


VD.002 VX.003 VX.008 VX.014 VX.031

12+2coax

10+coax

12+coax

2

12+coax

12+coax

12+coax

TC

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


SV102-3219

(VX.008)

(VX.031)

(VX.031)

(VX.031)

"1"

"3"

"2"

POWER SUPPLY FORDOOR PHONE SYSTEMWITH RELAY

(VX.008)

(C4.006)

9

2

230

-J

8

4

SN1

~0

PS

5

C2

7

0

~12C1

PS2

36

-+

1SN2

(VD.002)

CA

126

X2X1Y2Y1910

R1R2

Z1

R3Z2

RD

V3

V4V5

CA

126

X2X1Y2Y1910

R1R2

Z1

R3Z2

RD

V3

V4V5

CA

126

X2X1Y2Y1910

R1R2

Z1

R3Z2

RD

V3

V4V5

~12~0G/T

~12~0

U3

U1U2

G/T

TC

R1+TC

V3V5

~0~12

LINE ~

LINE ~

+-L

21A

1

SE1~0 ~12 R1 PS1~

+6/

R2-6APR1+TC SE2 ~ ~VIDEOPOWER SUPPLY

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

Lock Release

ELECTRICLOCK

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS



FUNCTION



The and service keys are used for intercom calls. When the video door phones are called in parallel by the video outdoor station, they switch on at the same time. At the end of the conversation, the electric lock is released pressing the key .Viewing lasts approximately 60 seconds, after which it is interrupted automatically following tripping of the timer incorporate in the power supply.

EQUIPMENT



Utopia modelN. 2 Video door phones Ref. 1703/1N. 2 Bracket Ref. 1703/90


TC



or

K-Steel modelN. 1 Module with camera Ref. 1755/41



N. 1 Video power supply Ref. 789/5BN. 1 Door phone power supply with relay Ref. 786/15N. 1 Kit of 10 diodes Ref. 1131/4

DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)


C4.014 VD.002 VX.003 VX.008 VX.014 VX.031

12+coax

10+coax

2

11+coax

8+coax

TC

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS



SV102-3220

(VX.031)(C4.014)

(VX.031)(C4.014)

"2"

"1"

(VX.008)

(VX.008)

(C4.006)

~0 U1G/T~12

LINE ~

~0~12 R1

+TC

V3V5

~

+-L

21A

1

(VD.002)

SE1~0 ~12 R1 PS1~

+6/

R2-6APR1+TC SE2 ~ ~

RDR1R2

6

CA

10

2

9

1

R3Z1Z2

V4V5V3

X1

Y1

X2

Y2

R1

6

CA

10

2

9

1

R3Z1Z2

V4V5V3

RD

R2

Y1

X2

Y2X1

9

2

-J

8

4

SN1

~0

PS

5

C2

7

SN2

C1

230

6

-

3

0

PS2~12

1

+TC

LINE

VIDEOPOWER SUPPLY

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

Lock Release

ELECTRICLOCK

POWER SUPPLY FORDOOR PHONE SYSTEMWITH RELAY

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

EXAMPLES OF COAXIAL CABLE CONNECTION

TC

TC

TC

Vid

eo p

ower

uni

t R

ef.

789/

5B c

an p

ower

up

to 1

0 vi

deo

dist

ribut

ors

Ref

. 179

4/4A

if A

tlant

ico,

or

Sca

itel

vide

o do

or p

hone

s ar

e no

t co

nnec

ted

in p

aral

lel.

Use

tw

o ad

ditio

nal

wire

s in

the

sys

tem

and

oth

er p

ower

un

its R

ef.

789/

2 (o

ne f

or e

ach

next

gro

up o

f 20

) to

in

stal

l mor

e di

strib

utor

s.W

ith d

istr

ibut

or i

n w

hich

the

U5

outp

ut i

s us

ed i

t is

ne

cess

ary

to

rem

ove

the

75

Ohm

re

sist

ance

(m

ount

ed r

aise

d fr

om th

e P

CB

) .

ONE RISER

SERIES CONNECTION

The cable goes in and

mes out from each video door phone

CONNECTION WITH DISTRIBUTION

TO THE FLOORS

CONNECTION WITH DISTRIBUTION AT RISER BEGINNING

In each riser the cable goes in and

comes out from each video door phone

SEVERAL RISER

Power supply

Ref.789/5B

(Max. 10

distributors)

Power supply

Ref.789/5B

(Max. 10

distributors)

No

te:

if on

the

vid

eo d

oor

phon

e te

rmin

als

V4

and

V5

ther

e is

not

the

coa

xial

cab

le c

onne

ct t

he

75Ω

1/4

W r

esis

tanc

e.

SV102-3294

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


TC

No

te:

if on

the

vid

eo d

oor

phon

e te

rmin

als

V4

and

V5

ther

e is

not

the

coa

xial

cab

le c

onne

ct t

he

75Ω

1/4

W r

esis

tanc

e.

Vid

eo p

ower

uni

t R

ef.

789/

5B c

an p

ower

up

to 1

0 vi

deo

dist

ribut

ors

Ref

. 17

94/4

A if

Atla

ntic

o, o

r S

caite

l m

onito

rs

are

not

conn

ecte

d in

pa

ralle

l. U

se

two

addi

tiona

l w

ires

in t

he s

yste

m a

nd o

ther

pow

er u

nits

R

ef.

789/

2 (o

ne f

or e

ach

next

gro

up o

f 20

) to

ins

tall

mor

e di

strib

utor

s.W

ith d

istr

ibut

or i

n w

hich

the

U5

outp

ut i

s us

ed i

t is

ne

cess

ary

to

rem

ove

the

75

Ohm

re

sist

ance

(m

ount

ed r

aise

d fr

om th

e P

CB

)

SEVERAL RISER

IN EACH RISER THE CABLE CONNECTION IS MADE WITH DISTRIBUTION TO THE FLOORS

Power supply

Ref.789/5B

(Max. 10

distributors)

SV102-3295

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

I COLUMN II COLUMN

(VX.001)

TC

VIDEODISTRIBUTORRef.1794/4A


TO THE FOLLOWING VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR


II GROUPDISTRIBUTOR

II GROUPDISTRIBUTOR

MAIN~ MAIN~

SUPPLEMENTARYPOWER SUPPLYRef.789/2


MAIN~ MAIN~


VIDEOPOWER SUPPLYRef.789/5B




I GROUPDISTRIBUTOR

I GROUPDISTRIBUTOR


TO THE FOLLOWING COLUMNS

Video power unit Ref. 789/5B can power up to 10 video distributors Ref. 1794/4A if Atlantico, or Scaitel monitors are not connected in parallel. Use two additional wires in the system and other power units Ref. 789/2 (one for each next group of 20) to install more distributors.With distributor in which the U5 output is used it is necessary to remove the 75 Ohm resistance (mounted raised from the PCB)

SEVERAL COLUMNS


SV102-3296A

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

EXAMPLE OF CONNECTION TVCC CAMERE OR MICROCAMERA

SV102-3229A

B/W

MICROCAMERA

12Vdc(VX.032)

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

COLOUR

1

2

1

2

1

12Vdc(VX.032)

2

2

Vision Powervoltage

Risolution(line)

Ref. Exampleof

connection

External

Internal

Internal

External

Use

1090/189

1090/117

1090/187

1090/185

1090/188

1090/191

1090/194

1090/198

>420

>420

>420

420

300

380

420

420

1840/44

1840/44

1840/44

1840/44

1090/850 or1090/849

1090/850 or1090/849

1090/850 or1090/849

1090/850 or1090/849

1090/849

1840/44

1840/44

1090/850 or1090/849

1090/850 or1090/849

1840/44

1090/849

Power supplyadvicedRef.

1090/840

1090/840

1090/840

1090/840

1090/840 onlyfor 1090/850

- -

1090/840

1090/840

1090/840

1090/840 onlyfor 1090/850

1090/840 onlyfor 1090/850

- -

1090/840 onlyfor 1090/850

1090/840 onlyfor 1090/850

1090/840 onlyfor 1090/850

AccessoriesRef.

Example 1

bi/nene

+ +TC12

R1-

CoaxR1+TC

(VX.008)Line~

Coax

+-12

Example 2

Example 3

(VX.008)

Coax

Line~

VOLTAGE ADAPTERPOWER SUPPLY

35012 Vcc

(VX.032)COLOUR 1840/44

1090/849

CAMERA

1840/44

1840/4412 Vcc

(VX.032)

230 Vca

12 Vcc(VX.033)

230 Vca

B/W

380

380

>380

>380

- -

- -

- -

1090/850 or1090/849

1090/850 or1090/849

NOTE: For optics, bracket, custody see the TVCC technical manual.

350 230 Vca

420 1090/850 or1090/849

Ref.Vision Power supplyadvicedRef.

Powervoltage

Risolution(line)

2

1

1840/44 1

2

1

3

3

1

2

3

Exampleof

connection

1090/241

1090/108

1090/141

1090/215

1090/142

230 Vca420 - - 31090/122

230 Vca420 - - 31092/002A

1090/243

1092/001A2

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

sec.1e−−−− 1DOOR PHONE - VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS: Installation Diagrams

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

5-WIRE ELECTRONICVIDEO DOOR PHONE

SYSTEMS

SECTION 1E(REV.D)


SECTION 1E CONTENTS


DO

OR

PH

ON

E A

ND

VID

EO

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

M -

DIA

GR

AM

- S

ectio

n 1E


Diagram Sec. Pag.BASIC DIAGRAMS FOR 5-WIRE ELECTRONIC DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS

CONNECTION OF 2 VIDEO DOOR PHONES TO 1 VIDEO DOOR UNIT.................................................... SV102-3147B ..............1e ................2

CONNECTION OF 1 VIDEO DOOR PHONE TO 1 VIDEO DOOR UNIT ...................................................... SV102-2082C ..............1e ................4

CONNECTION OF 2 VIDEO DOOR PHONES TO 1 VIDEO DOOR UNIT.................................................... SV102-2081B ..............1e ................5

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONE TO 1 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATION......................... SV102-2633H .............1e ................6

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONE TO 2 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATIONAutomatic switching during calls (Mod. Sinthesi or Mod. K-Steel) ................................................................SV102-2902G ..............1e ................8

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONE TO 2 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATIONAutomatic switching during calls (Mod. 725) ................................................................................................. SV102-2913B ..............1e ............. 10

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONE TO 4 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATIONSAutomatic switching during calls (Mod. Sinthesi or Mod. K-Steel) ................................................................. SV102-3092D ..............1e ............. 12

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONE TO 4 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATIONSAutomatic switching during calls (Mod. 725) .................................................................................................. SV102-2806F ..............1e ............. 14

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONE TO 1 VIDEO DOOR UNIT AND 1 DOOR UNITAutomatic switching during calls (Mod. Sinthesi o K-Steel)............................................................................ SV102-3121C ..............1e ............. 16

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL SETS OF VIDEO DOOR PHONESTO 1 MAIN VIDEO OUTDOOR STATIONEach column is also connected to its own secondary video outdoor station(Mod. Sinthesi or Mod. K-Steel) .................................................................................................................... SV102-3060B ..............1e ............. 18

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL SETS OF VIDEO DOOR PHONESTO 1 MAIN VIDEO OUTDOOR STATIONEach column is also connected to its own secondary outdoor station(Mod. Sinthesi or Mod. K-Steel) ..................................................................................................................... SV102-3094D ..............1e ............. 20

CONNECTION OF 4 VIDEO DOOR PHONES TO 1 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATION(Mod. Sinthesi or Mod. K-Steel)The video door unit calls the 4 video door phones in parallel with switch-on at the same time ..................... SV102-3166C ............. 1e ............. 22

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL COLOUR VIDEO DOOR PHONES TO 1 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATION(Mod. Sinthesi) ............................................................................................................................................... SV102-3122E ..............1e ............. 24

CONNECTION OF 1 VIDEO DOOR PHONE AND 1 DOOR PHONETO 1 RISING COLUMN. SINGLE CALLS........................................................................................................ SV102-3239 ..............1e ........... 26

CONNECTION OF ONE DOOR PHONE IN PARALLEL TO 1 VIDEO DOOR PHONE ............................... SV102-1710D ..............1e ........... 26

CONNECTION OF TWO VIDEO DOOR PHONES IN PARALLEL ............................................................... SV102-1712F ..............1e ........... 26

CONNECTION OF A CALL REPEATER RELAY Ref. 788/52 FOR OPERATING ADDITIONAL RINGER... SV102-1470C ..............1e ............. 27

CONNECTION OF A CALL REPEATER RELAY Ref. 788/22 FOR OPERATING ADDITIONAL RINGER......SV102-3240 ..............1e ............. 27EXAMPLE OF CONNECTION FOR RELEASING DOOR LOCKDURING A CALL BY THE VIDEO DOOR PHONE ...........................................................................................SV102-3238 ..............1e ............. 27

EXAMPLE OF SIGNAL A, SIGNAL B AND POWER (R1, R2)DISTRIBUTION ON SEVERAL COLUMNS ................................................................................................... SV102-2978C ..............1e ............. 28

I −−−− sec.1e

SECTION 1E CONTENTS


DO

OR

PH

ON

E A

ND

VID

EO

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

M -

DIA

GR

AM

- S

ectio

n 1E

DOOR PHONE - VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS: Installation Diagrams sec.1e −−−− II

5-WIRE VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEM DIAGRAM CROSS-REFERENCE TABLE

Use of kits

PAG

6

24

10

26

26

26

12

20

16

18

8

27

27

27

14

SV102-2633H

SV102-3122E

SV102-2913B

SV102-3239

SV102-1712F

SV102-1710D

SV102-3092D

SV102-3094D

SV102-3121C

SV102-3060B

SV102-2902G

SV102-1470C

SV102-3240

SV102-3238

SV102-2806F

SV102-3166C 22

2

4

1

1

1

√

√√

√

√

√ √

√√ √

√

√

√

Generic

Sinthesi

Sinthesi orK-Steel

Sinthesi orK-Steel

Sinthesi orK-Steel

Sinthesi orK-Steel

Sinthesi orK-Steel

Sinthesi orK-Steel

725

725

0 0 0

COLLEGAMENTO DI 2 VIDEOCITOFONI AD 1 VIDEOPORTIERE ELETTRICO 5SV102-2081B√Sinthesi 0 0 0

COLLEGAMENTO DI 1 VIDEOCITOFONO AD 1 VIDEOPORTIERE ELETTRICO 4SV102-2082C√Smyle

0 0 0

COLLEGAMENTO DI MAX 2 VIDEOCITOFONI AD 1 VIDEOPORTIERE ELETTRICO 2SV102-3147B√√

√

√0 0 0

0 0 0

√0 0 0

√0 0 0

√0 0 0

√0 0 0

0 0 0

0 0 K

√0 1 0

√K 1 0


Panel model




Number of secondary door phone panels to be installed




Use of some door phones for audio service only

Colour camera

Possibility of opening door during call

DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION DIAGRAM

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONE TO 1 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATION

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL COLOUR VIDEO DOOR PHONESTO 1 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATION

CONNECTION OF 4 VIDEO DOOR PHONES TO 1 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATIONThe video door unit calls the 4 video door phones in parallel with switch-on at the same time

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL SETS OF VIDEO DOOR PHONESTO 1 MAIN VIDEO OUTDOOR STATIONEach column is also connected to its own secondary outdoor station

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONE TO 1 VIDEO DOOR UNITAND 1 DOOR UNITAutomatic switching during calls

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL SETS OF VIDEO DOOR PHONESTO 1 MAIN VIDEO OUTDOOR STATIONEach column is also connected to its own secondary video outdoor station

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONE TO 2 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATIONAutomatic switching during calls

CONNECTION OF 1 VIDEO DOOR PHONE AND 1 DOOR PHONETO 1 RISING COLUMN. SINGLE CALLS

CONNECTION OF TWO VIDEO DOOR PHONES IN PARALLEL

CONNECTION OF ONE DOOR PHONE IN PARALLEL TO 1 VIDEO DOOR PHONE

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONE TO 4 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATIONSAutomatic switching during calls

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONE TO 2 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATIONAutomatic switching during calls

CONNECTION OF A CALL REPEATER RELAY Ref. 788/52FOR OPERATING ADDITIONAL RINGER

CONNECTION OF A CALL REPEATER RELAY Ref. 788/22 FOR OPERATING ADDITIONAL RINGER

EXAMPLE OF CONNECTION FOR RELEASING DOOR LOCKDURING A CALL BY THE VIDEO DOOR PHONE

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONE TO 4 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATIONSAutomatic switching during calls


BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S

2 −−−− sec.1e DOOR PHONE - VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS: Installation Diagrams

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

FUNCTION

The system can be used to connect the video door unit to various video door phones fi tted in apartments.When a visitor presses a button on the panel, a two-tone electronic call signal is sent to the corresponding video door phone speaker and the image appears on the screen a few seconds later. At this point, the user can see the visitor and reply by picking up the handset.All video door phones are normally deactivated (no sound is heard when the handset is picked up); only the video door phone called from the door can start the conversation. No other users can cut into the call.The voice circuit of the called video door phone remains activate until the following call is made from the panel to another device.The door opening function is connected to conversation privacy; this means that a user must be called to be able to open the electrical lock.

EQUIPMENT


“5-WIRE” VIDEO DOOR PHONE KIT DIAGRAMS

N. 1 One-family kit (1 button) with Atlantico video door phone Ref. 1702/601 consisting of: • Sinthesi camera with integrated door unit and 1 calling

button Ref. 1745/21 • 1 Atlantico video door phone Ref. 1702/1 with bracket

Ref. 1202/955 • Flush-mounting box for 2 modules Ref. 1145/52 • Module holder with frame for 2 modules Ref. 1145/62 • Power unit 230Vac-38VA, 10 DIN modules Ref. 789/5B orN. 1 One-family kit (1 button) with Artico video door phone Ref. 1705/601 consisting of: • Sinthesi camera with integrated door unit and 1 calling

button Ref. 1745/21 • 1 Artico video door phoneRef. 1705/1 with bracket

Ref. 1705/955 • Flush-mounting box for 2 modules Ref. 1145/52 • Module holder with frame for 2 modules Ref. 1145/62 • Power unit 230Vac-38VA, 10 DIN modules Ref. 789/5B orN. 1 Two-family kit (2 buttons) with Atlantico video door phone Ref. 1702/602 consisting of: • Sinthesi camera with integrated door unit and 2 calling

buttons Ref. 1745/22 • 2 Atlantico video door phones Ref. 1702/1 with bracket

Ref. 1202/955 • Flush-mounting box for 2 modules Ref. 1145/52 • Module holder with frame for 2 modules Ref. 1145/62 • Power unit 230Vac-38VA, 10 DIN modules Ref. 789/5B orN. 1 Two-family kit (2 buttons) with Artico video door phone Ref. 1705/602 consisting of: • Sinthesi camera with integrated door unit and 2 calling

buttons Ref. 1745/22 • 2 Artico video door phones Ref. 1705/1 with bracket

Ref. 1705/955 • Flush-mounting box for 2 modules Ref. 1145/52 • Module holder with frame for 2 modules Ref. 1145/62 • Power unit 230Vac-38VA, 10 DIN modules Ref. 789/5B

DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

V5.001V5.006

(*) For two-family kits only

5

7

6

10

2

TC

(*)

CONNECTION OF 2 VIDEO DOOR PHONES TO 1 VIDEO DOOR UNIT

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

SV102-3147B


(V5.006)

CA

B

R2

A

R1

CA

A

R2

B

R1

0

+6

PS

R2

~12

+R

R2

~0

AP

SE2

1/~

-6

+TCSE1

R1

230

R1

TCC1C2

R1AB

+TC

~

45F

G/T3

1/~

SE

SN1/~

PS

(*)

CAMERA UNITWITH DOOR UNITAND 2 BUTTONS

MAIN~Lock Release

VIDEOPOWER SUPPLY

ELECTRIC LOCK

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

EQUIPMENT



N. 1 One-family kit (1 button) Ref. 956/31 consisting of: • Smyle panel with camera and 1 button with built-in door

unit. • 1 Artico video door phone with bracket • Power unit 110-230Vac 38VA, 7 DIN modules

DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

V5.007V5.011

SV102-2082C

FUNCTION

The system can be used to connect the video door unit to the video door phone fi tted in the apartment.When a visitor presses a button on the panel, a two-tone electronic call signal is sent to the corresponding video door phone speaker and the image appears on the screen a few seconds later. At this point, the user can see the visitor and reply by picking up the handset.The door opening function is connected to conversation privacy; this means that a user must be called to be able to open the electrical lock.

6

4

2

TC

CONNECTION OF 1 VIDEO DOOR PHONE TO 1 VIDEO DOOR UNIT

(V5.011)

R3

TC

MAIN~

LockRelease

POWER SUPPLY

ELECTRIC LOCK

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

FUNCTION

The system can be used to connect the video door unit to the video door phone fi tted in the apartment.When a visitor presses a button on the panel, a two-tone electronic call signal is sent to the corresponding video door phone speaker and the image appears on the screen a few seconds later. At this point, the user can see the visitor and reply by picking up the handset.The door opening function is connected to conversation privacy; this means that a user must be called to be able to open the electrical lock.

EQUIPMENT


VIDEO DOOR PHONE KIT DIAGRAMS

N. 1 Two-family kit (2 buttons) Ref. 956/32 consisting of: • Smyle panel with camera and 2 buttons with built-in door

unit. • 2 Artico video door phones with bracket • Power unit 110-230Vac 38VA, 7 DIN modules

DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

V5.007V5.0117

6

8

4

TC

2


SV102-2081B

(V5.011)

(V5.011)

(V5.006)

R3

R3

2

1

TC

MAIN~

LockRelease

POWER SUPPLY

ELECTRIC LOCK

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

FUNCTION

The 5-wire video door phone system implements conversation privacy, call and door opener functions in normal door phone systems with only 5 wires in the riser column: 4 commons + 1 single for each device.The door unit is powered with only two wires and a transformer at 12V~.The most interesting application of a 5-wire system is in old buildings where a door phone system is already fi tted. The existing system can be transformed into a video door phone system without adding wires to the column or in the apartments.Specifi c conversation privacy circuits must be fi tted in the panel for ensuring conversation privacy for all video door phones in the system (one for each button). All video door phones are normally deactivated (no sound is heard when the handset is picked up); only the video door phone called from the door can start the conversation. No other users can cut into the call. The voice circuit of the called video door phone remains activate until the following call is made from the panel to another device.The door opening function is connected to conversation privacy; this means that a user must be called to be able to open the electrical lock.

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONETO 1 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATION

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

2 10+n

4+n

4+n

5

5

5

5

2 x 82Ω 1/4W

TC

5

5

5

5

EQUIPMENT

The following devices are needed for the system illustrated in diagram SV102-2633H:


Atlantico modelN. X Video door phone Ref. 1702/1N. X Bracket Ref. 1202/955

or

Artico modelN. X Video door phone Ref. 1705/1N. X Bracket Ref. 1705/955


TC

Sinthesi modelN. 1 Module with camera and door unit Ref. 1745/20-/21-/22N. X Button modules Ref. 1145/11-/12-/13-/14N. X/4 Conversation privacy device Ref. 1145/74


or

K-Steel modelN. 1 Module camera Ref. 1755/30AN. 1 Module with door unit Ref. 1155/30-/31-/32AN. X Button modules Ref. 1155/11-/12A-/13A-/14AN. X/4 Conversation privacy device Ref. 1145/74


or

725 modelN. 1 Panel with N buttons Mod. 725N. 1 Amplifi ed door unit Ref. 1035/67N. 1 Camera Ref. 725/600N. 1 Video adapter Ref. 1742/13AN. 1 Front plate Ref. 725/601-/602N. X/4 Conversation privacy device Ref. 1035/25



N. 1 Video power supply Ref. 789/5BN. 1 Video distributor Ref. 955/40

DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.007 C4.008 C4.018 CU.009 VD.002V5.001 VU.002 VX.006 VX.008 VX.014

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONETO 1 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATION

SV102-2633H

(VX.014)

(CU.009)

(C4.007)(C4.008)

(VX.008)

Mod. K-Steel/SinthesiMod.725

(VU.002)

(VX.006) (VX.006)

(C4.018)

ABR1

+TC

2 x 82 1/4W

R1R2

CA

AB

1

4

G/T

~0

4

~12G/T 1

C1

C4C3C2

U4U3U2U1

~0~12

R1BA

~

5

~12~0

+TC

1/~

2

SN1

C1C2

~0~12

C2C1

R1BA

+TC

~

5

1/~

SE

SN1/~

K-Steel Sinthesi

44

F F

PSPS

G/TG/T3

R1R2

CA

AB

(VD.002)

TC

R1R2

CA

AB

R1R2

CA

AB

~

~12~0

~

4 41 1

SN

2

3

1/~5

~

P. E.

PS4

A

R2

R2

A

IIIII

B

B

B

IV

A

R1

R1

B

A

R1R2

R2R1

B

R1R2

A

A

R2

B

R1

I

+6-6

R2+R

APR1

1/~

SE2~12

PS

~0

R2

+TCR1

SE1

~

~

A

R2

R2

A

IIIII

B

B

B

IV

A

R1

R1

B

A

R1R2

R2R1

B

R1R2

A

A

R2

B

R1

I

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR


VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

To thefollowing

conversationprivacy device


BUTTON MODULE

Name taglighting

To thefollowing

conversationprivacydevice

LIGHT BULBTRANSFORMERLINE~

LINE~

Name taglighting

LockRelease

ELECTRIC LOCK

VIDEOPOWER SUPPLY

Camera+

Adapter

Name taglighting

ELECTRIC LOCK

Output

Input

Output

Input

R1R2

CA

AB

R1R2

CA

AB

R1R2

CA

AB

R1R2

CA

AB

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

FUNCTION


EQUIPMENT

The following devices are needed for the system illustrated in diagram SV102-2902G:



or



TC



or




N. 1 Video power supply Ref. 789/5BN. 1 Transformer Ref. 9000/230N. 1 Relay box Ref. 788/51N. X Video distributor Ref. 955/40

DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.007 C4.008 C4.016 C4.018 CU.009 V5.001 VD.002 VX.006 VX.008 VX.014

VX.021Cut or remove the jumpers on the device(s):a) PS - G/Tb) 4 - F

2 14+n

4+n

4+n

5

5

5

5

213+n

TC TC

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

2 x 82Ω 1/4W

5

5

5

5

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONE TO 2 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATIONAutomatic switching during calls (Mod. Sinthesi or Mod. K-Steel)

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

SV102-2902G

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONE TO 2 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATIONAutomatic switching during calls (Mod. Sinthesi or Mod. K-Steel)


(VX.014)

(VX.008)

(C4.007)(C4.008)

(C4.007)

COLUMN

(C4.008)

(C4.016) (C4.016)

"1"

(CU.009) (CU.009)

(VX.006)

(VX.021)(VX.021)

(VX.008)

4

BA

~

PSF5

G/T3

~12~0

1/~

2

SN1

C1C2

~0~12

C2C1

BA

~

PSF5

G/T3

1/~

SE

SN1/~

4

K-Steel Sinthesi

R1 R1+TC +TC

R1R2

CA

AB

2 x 82 1/4W

R1R2

CA

AB

~~~ ~012

LINE~

R1R2

CA

AB

69

C2

15

~0~12

11

14

137

C1

1

4

SN1210

123SN2

85

R1R2

CA

AB

-66

+ ~ ~ R2R10

+

~

~TC12/

PS ~1APR+R1

BA

R2R1

BA

R2R1

AB

R2R1

BA

R1R2

IVIII

I

A B

BA

R1R2

R1R2

II

(C4.018)

TC

BA

R2R1

BA

R2R1

AB

R2R1

BA

R1R2

IVIII

I

A B

BA

R1R2

R1R2

II

U2U3U4

U1

~0~12G/T

~0~12G/T

(VD.002)

4

BA

~

PSF5

G/T3

~12~0

1/~

2

SN1

C1C2

~0~12

C2C1

BA

~

PSF5

G/T3

1/~

SE

SN1/~

4

K-SteelSinthesi

R1R1+TC+TC

LINE ~

(C4.018)

LINE ~

C1C2C3C4 U4

U3U2U1

~0~12

G/T

G/T

~0~12

4

4

1

1

R1R2

CA

AB

~ ~ ~12~

TC

(VD.002)

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

TO THE FOLLOWINGVIDEO DISTRIBUTOR

Output

Input

Output

Input

BUTTON MODULEBUTTON MODULE




privacy device


Name taglighting

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

LockRelease

LockRelease

ELECTRICLOCK

ELECTRICLOCK

RELAYBOX

TRANSFORMERVIDEO POWER SUPPLY

R1R2

CA

AB

R1R2

CA

AB

R1R2

CA

AB

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

FUNCTION


EQUIPMENT




or



TC





DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

CU.009 V5.001 VU.002 VX.006 VX.008 VX.014

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONE TO 2 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATIONAutomatic switching during calls (Mod. 725)

2 14+n

4+n

4+n

5

5

5

5

213+n

TC TC

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

2 x 82Ω 1/4W

5

5

5

5

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONE TO 2 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATIONAutomatic switching during calls (Mod. 725 or Mod. Domus Aura)

(VX.014)

"1"

(VU.002)

(VX.006)

(VX.008)

(VX.008)

(VU.002)

(CU.009)(CU.009)

"2"

TC TC

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR


Output

Input

Output

Input

RELAYBOX

TV Camera+

adapter

TV Camera+

adapter

Push

button

panel

Push

button

panel

LockRelease

LockRelease

ELECTRICLOCK

ELECTRICLOCK

LINE~ LINE~

TRANSFORMER LIGHT BULBTRANSFORMER

VIDEO POWERSUPPLY

LINE~

Name taglighting


COLUMN SV102-2913B

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

FUNCTION


EQUIPMENT




or



TC



or





DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.007 C4.008 C4.016 C4.018 CU.009 V5.001 VD.002 VX.006 VX.008 VX.014

VX.021Cut or remove the jumpers on the device(s):a) PS - G/Tb) 4 - F

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONE TO 4 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATIONS

Automatic switching during calls (Mod. Sinthesi or Mod. K-Steel)

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

2

15+n

4+n

4+n

5

5

5

5

2

14+n2 2

14+n14+n

TC TC

TC TC

2 x 82Ω 1/4W

5

5

5

5

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

SV102-3092D

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONE TO 4 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATIONS

Automatic switching during calls (Mod. Sinthesi or Mod. K-Steel)

(C4.016)

(VX.021)

(C4.007)(C4.008)

(C4.016)

(VX.008)

(VX.008)

(C4.008)(C4.007)

"4"

(C4.007)

(C4.007)

(C4.008)

(C4.008)

(CU.009)

(CU.009)

(VX.006)

(VX.021) (VX.021)

(VX.021)

(VX.008)

(VX.014)

(VX.008)

"3"

"1"

"2"

(C4.016)(CU.009)

(C4.016)(CU.009)

R1R2

BA

R2R1

BA

R2R1

II IV

A B

AI

B

A

A

R1

III

B

R2

R2

R2R1

B

R1

BA

~

~12~0

1/~

2

1

C1C2

~0~12

C2C1

BA

~1/~

SE

1/~

K-SteelSinthesi

R1R1+TC +TC

3G/TG/T

55

4PSFSNSN

FPS4TC

(C4.018)

(VD.002)

TC

(VD.002)

TC

LINE~

~0~12

U3U2

~0~12G/T

G/TU1

U4

~~~~120

R1R2

CA

AB

R1R2

CA

AB

(VD.002)

R1R2

CA

AB

~ ~ ~ ~12 0

LINE~

R2 ~0+TC ~12PSR1 ~ ~1/~ ~ ~ ~ ~12

R1R2

BA

R2R1

BA

R2R1

II IV

A B

AI

B

A

A

R1

III

B

R2

R2

R2R1

B

R1

~ ~ ~ ~12 0

R1R2

CA

AB

R1R2

CA

AB

BA

~

~12~0

1/~

2

1

C1C2

~0~12

C2C1

BA

~1/~

SE

1/~

K-Steel Sinthesi

R1 R1+TC+TC

3G/T G/T

5 5

4PSFSN SN

FPS4

(C4.018)

C1C2C3C4 U4

U3U2U1

~0~12

G/T

G/T

~0~12

4

41

1

BA

~

~12~0

1/~

2

1

C1C2

~0~12

C2C1

BA

~1/~

SE

1/~

K-SteelSinthesi

R1R1+TC +TC

3G/TG/T

55

4PSFSNSN

FPS4

U2U3U4

U1

~0~12G/T

~0~12G/T

(C4.018)

BA

~

~12~0

1/~

2

1

C1C2

~0~12

C2C1

BA

~1/~

SE

1/~

K-Steel Sinthesi

R1 R1+TC+TC

3G/T G/T

5 5

4PSFSN SN

FPS4

(VD.002)

~0~12

U3U2

~0~12G/T

G/TU1

U4

9621R1R2 V3V5

V3SN3

C3

+6

~0SEV5

~12

-6

2

C

R1

1

+TC

2

A

V5

+TCR1

~12

V3

R1-6

+TC

D

SN1

C4

SE SE

-6

1

~12

2

SN4

+6V3

V5

1

C1

~0

+6

~0

B

1

V5

-6

SE

R1

~0

+TC

V3+6

SN2

~12

2

C2

-6I +6R1 ~B~12 ~A ~0R2 SEAP GND+TC-6U

TC

(C4.018)

2 x 82 1/4W

COLUMN


DISTRIBUTOR

Input

Output

Output

DISTRIBUTOR

Input

TRANSFORMER

LINE~

COLUMN

INPUT INPUT


Name taglighting

LockRelease

ELECTRICLOCK

LINE~


Name taglighting

LockRelease

ELECTRICLOCK

Button module Button module

LINE~

TRANSFORMER


Name taglighting

LockRelease

ELECTRICLOCK

VOLTAGE

INPUT INPUT

RELAYBOX

TRANSFORMER



privacy device

Button moduleButton moduleConversation

privacy device

Name taglighting

LockRelease

ELECTRICLOCK


Name taglighting

VIDEO POWERSUPPLY

R1R2

CA

AB

R1R2

CA

AB

R1R2

CA

AB

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

FUNCTION


EQUIPMENT

The following devices are needed for the system illustrated in diagram SV102-2806F:



or



TC





DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

CU.009 V5.001 VX.006 VX.008 VX.014 VU.002

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONETO 4 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATIONS

Automatic switching during calls (Mod. 725)

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

2

15+n

4+n

4+n

5

5

5

5

2

14+n2 2

14+n14+n

TC TC

TC TC

2 x 82Ω 1/4W

5

5

5

5

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONETO 4 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATIONS

Automatic switching during calls (Mod. 725)

SV102-2806F

"2"

(VU.002)

"1"

(VX.008)

COLUMN

(VX.008)

(VX.006)

(CU.009)

(CU.009)

(CU.009)

"3"

(VU.002)

(VU.002)

TRANSFORMER

(VX.008)

"4"

(VU.002)

(CU.009)

RELAYBOX

(VX.014)

(VX.008)

R1R2

BA

R2R1

BA

R2R1

II IV

A B

AI

B

A

A

R1

III

B

R2

R2

R2R1

B

R1

P. E.

~

5SN

2

4PS

31/~

~~~120~

R1R2

CA

AB

R1R2

CA

AB

2 x 82 1/4W

R1R2

BA

R2R1

BA

R2R1

II IV

A B

AI

B

A

A

R1

III

B

R2

R2

R2R1

B

R1

P. E.

~

5SN

2

4PS

31/~

~

R1R2

CA

AB

TC

BA

R1+TC

~ ~ ~ ~12 0

R1R2

CA

AB

TC

COLUMN

9621R1R2 V3V5

-6

+TC

V3

C4

V3

C3

+6

2

+6

R1

1

R1

SN4

2+TC

-6

SN3

1

C D

+TCR1

AR1

+TC

A

-

SN2

AP~

TC

G~

12

N

2

I

+6

6~

1

C2SN1

~

V3

6+

B

B

C1

+6

0

-6

H+

SE

R1

V3

-6

N12R2 D

V5~12~0SE

~0~12V5

SE

~0~12V5

SE

V5

SE

~12~0

BA

R1+TC

~ ~ ~ ~12 0

TC

11 44

P. E.

~

5SN

2

4PS

31/~

BA

R1+TC

R1R2

CA

AB

11 44

BA

R1+TC

1/SER1

1R2

2~ SE

0 RAP +

12+ ~R2 PSTC

R1

~

~6-

6+

TV Camera+

Adapter

TV Camera+

Adapter

TV Camera+

Adapter

TV Camera+

Adapter

~~~~120

TCP. E.

~

5SN

2

4PS

31/~

Output

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

Input

Output

Input


LINE ~

TRANSFORMER

LockRelease

LockRelease

LockRelease

LockRelease

ELECTRICLOCK

ELECTRICLOCK

ELECTRICLOCK

ELECTRICLOCK

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

Name taglighting


LINE~

LINE

~LINE

TRANSFORMER

~LINE


VIDEO POWER SUPPLY

VOLTAGE

INPUT INPUT

INPUT INPUT

R1R2

CA

AB

R1R2

CA

AB

R1R2

CA

AB

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

FUNCTION

This type of system is used to connect a video door phone column to an automatically switching video door unit or door unit.A two-tone electronic call is sent to the corresponding video door phone speaker when a call button is pressed on either of the two panels; the picture appears on the screen after approximately seven seconds if the call was made by the video door unit.The video door phone will not light up and the video door phone will work as a normal door phone if the call is made from thcamera unit and panel. Press at the end of the call to open the concerned door electrical lock only.

EQUIPMENT




or



TC

Sinthesi modelN. 1 Module with camera and door unit Ref. 1745/20-/21-/22N. X Button modules Ref. 1145/11-/12-/13-/14N. X/4 Conversation privacy device Ref.1145/74


or






or





DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.006 C4.007 C4.008 C4.016 C4.018 CU.009V5.001 VD.002 VU.002 VX.006 VX.008 VX.014

VX.021aCut or remove the jumpers on the device(s):a) PS - G/T b) 4 - F

VX.021bCut or remove the jumpers on the device(s):a) 4 - F

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONETO 1 VIDEO DOOR UNIT AND 1 DOOR UNIT

Automatic switching during calls (Mod. Sinthesi o K-Steel)

4+n

4+n

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

VIDEODISTRIBUTORE

VIDEODISTRIBUTORE

2 x 82Ω 1/4W

TC

2 8+n 214+n

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

SV102-3121C

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL VIDEO DOOR PHONETO 1 VIDEO DOOR UNIT AND 1 DOOR UNIT

Automatic switching during calls (Mod. Sinthesi o K-Steel)

(VX.014)

(VX.006)

(VX.008)

(VX.021a)

TRANSFORMER

(VX.008)

Mod. K-Steel/Sinthesi

(C4.008)(C4.007)

(VX.021b)

(C4.008)

(CU.009)

(C4.007)

(C4.016)

Mod. K-Steel/Sinthesi

(C4.006)

(CU.009)(C4.016)

BA

~

F

~12~0

1/~

2

1

C1C2

~0~12

C2C1

BA

~

F

1/~

SE

1/~

K-Steel Sinthesi

3G/TG/T

44PSPS

5 5SNSN

R1R1+TC+TC

U2U3U4

U1

~0~12

G/T

G/T

~0~12

~ ~+TC

R112~

0~ PS 1/~ R1 R2R2+R +6-6

1

4

G/T

~0

4

~12G/T 1

C1

C4C3C2

U4U3U2U1

~0~12

R1R2

CA

AB

U1G/T G/T

1/~

2

1

34

~

FPS

C1C2

5SN

~12~0

~12~0

~~~~12

TC

R1R2

CA

AB

~~~~120

BA

R2R1

AB

R2R1

III

I

A B

BA R1

R2

II

BA

R1

B

R2

A

R2

R2

R1

R1

IV

LINE~

2 x 82 1/4W

(C4.018)

BA

R2R1

AB

R2R1

III

I

A B

BA R1

R2

II

BA

R1

B

R2

A

R2

R2

R1

R1

IV

R1R2

CA

AB

R1R2

CA

AB

LINE~LINE~

TV CAMERA

(VD.002)

C1

4

2SN11

C2

3SN2

~12~0

965

13

12

7

1511

8

1410

Output

Input

Output

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

Input


LockRelease

LockRelease

ELECTRICLOCK

ELECTRICLOCK

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

To thefollowingmodule

BUTTON MODULE


BUTTON MODULE


VIDEO POWER SUPPLY

RELAYBOX

AMPLIFIEDLOUDSPEAKING

UNIT


To the followingconversationprivacy device

R1R2

CA

AB

R1R2

CA

AB

R1R2

CA

AB

R1R2

CA

AB

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

FUNCTION



EQUIPMENT




or



TC

Sinthesi modelN. 1+K Module with camera and door unit Ref. 1745/20-/21-/22N. X Button modules Ref. 1145/11-/12-/13-/14N. X/4 Conversation privacy device Ref. 1145/74


or

K-Steel modelN. 1+K Module camera Ref. 1755/30AN. 1+K Module with door unit Ref. 1155/30-/31-/32AN. X Button modules Ref. 1155/11-/12A-/13A-/14AN. X/4 Conversation privacy device Ref. 1145/74



N. K Video power supply Ref. 789/5BN. 1 Transformer Ref. 9000/230N. K Relay box Ref. 788/51N. X Video distributor Ref. 955/40N. 1 Supplementary power supply Ref. 1090/850

DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.007 C4.008 C4.014 C4.017 CU.009V5.001 VD.002 VX.006 VX.008 VX.014

VX.021aCut or remove the jumpers on the device(s):a) 4 - F

VX.021bCut or remove the jumpers on the device(s):a) P1 - P2

CONNECTION OF SEVERAL SETS OF VIDEO DOOR PHONESTO 1 MAIN VIDEO OUTDOOR STATION

Each column is also connected to its own secondary video outdoor station(Mod. Sinthesi or Mod. K-Steel)

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

4+n

4+n

5

5

5

5

5 5

55

22

5 5

5

4+n

4+n

5

5

5

5

5

2

11+k(n+1)

8+n8+n

14+n14+n

TCTC

TC

2 x 82Ω 1/4W 2 x 82Ω 1/4W


BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

SV102-3060B


Each column is also connected to its own secondary video outdoor station(Mod. Sinthesi or Mod. K-Steel)

BOX

(C4.007)(C4.008)

(VX.021a)

(VX.006)

(VX.021b)(VX.008)

ADDITIONAL POWERSUPPLY UNIT

Calls

TO THE FOLLOWING

COLUMN

(VX.014)

(VX.008)

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

TRANSFORMER

SECONDARY

(CU.009)(C4.017)

(VX.008)

(VX.014)

(C4.014)

RELAY

(VX.021a)

(C4.008)(C4.007)

MAIN

(CU.009)(C4.017)

2 x 82 -1/4W

~~~~12

R1R2

CA

AB

R1R2 BA

I

R2R1 BA

R1R2

BA

R2R1

AB

R1R2

AB

R1R2

AB

IV

II

III

LINE~

R1R2

BA

R2R1

BA

R2R1

R2R1

AB

R2R1

BA

R1R2

IVII

I III

A

A B

B

U4U3U2U1

~0~12

G/T

G/T

C1C2C3C4

1 4

1 4

~0~12

Sinthesi K-Steel

BA

~

~12~0

1/~

2

R1+TC

3

BA

~1/~

SE

1/~

R1+TC

3

55

PSFSNSN

FPS4

1

0

230

P2

P1

GNDoutV

3

12

6

C2

9

101 13

SN2

11 14

15

SN1

4

2

7C1

8

~0~12

5

x

U4U3U2U1

~0~12

G/T

G/T

C1C2C3C4

1 4

1 4

~0~12

TC

0

230

R2

1/~

~12~0

R1

-6+6

+R

+TCPS

R1R2AP

SE2SE3

SE1

R1R2

CA

AB

R1R2

CA

AB

G/T

U2U3U4

U1

G/T~12~0

~12~0

LINE ~

R1R2

CA

AB

R1R2

BA

R2R1

BA

R2R1

R2R1

AB

R2R1

BA

R1R2

IVII

I III

A

A B

B

(VD.002)

G/T

U2U3U4

U1

G/T~12~0

~12~0

~0~12

U3U2

~0~12G/T

G/TU1

U4

MAIN ~

R1R2

CA

AB

G/T

U2U3U4

U1

G/T~12~0

~12~0

K-Steel Sinthesi

SN

1/~~

F5

1/~

3

45

2

PS3

SE

PS

~

FSN

1/~1

+TC +TCR1

AABB

R1

~12~0

LINE ~

TC

2 x 821/4W

~0

~

~

~12

~0~12

U3U2

~0~12G/T

G/TU1

U4

TC

LINE ~

~0~12

U3U2

~0~12G/T

G/TU1

U4

~~~~012

(VD.002)


AS 1ST COLUMN

Output

Input

Output

Input

Output

Input

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR




BUTTON MODULE

BUTTON MODULE



privacy device

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

LockRelease

ELECTRICLOCK

LockRelease

ELECTRICLOCK

TV CAMERA UNITAMPLIFIED LOUDSPEAKING

UNIT


UNIT

VIDEO POWERSUPPLY



R1R2

CA

AB

R1R2

CA

AB

R1R2

CA

AB

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

FUNCTION



EQUIPMENT




or



TC



or




Sinthesi modelN. X Button modules Ref. 1145/11-/12-/13-/14N. K Module with door unit set-up Ref. 1145/20-/21N. K Amplifi ed door unit Ref. 1145/67N. X/4 Conversation privacy device Ref. 1145/74


or

K-Steel modelN. X Button modules Ref.1155/11-/12A-/13A-/14AN. K Module with door unit Ref. 1155/30-/31-/32AN. X/4 Conversation privacy device Ref. 1145/74



N. K Video power supply Ref. 789/5BN. 1 Transformer Ref. 9000/230N. K Relay box Ref. 788/51N. X Video distributor Ref. 955/40N. 1 Supplementary power supply Ref. 1090/850N. X Kit of 10 diodes Ref. 1131/4

DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

C4.007 C4.008 C4.014 C4.017 CU.009V5.001 VD.002 VX.006 VX.008 VX.014

VX.021aCut or remove the jumpers on the device(s):a) 4 - F

VX.021bCut or remove the jumpers on the device(s):a) P1 - P2


Each column is also connected to its own secondary outdoor station(Mod. Sinthesi or Mod. K-Steel)

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

4+n

4+n

5

5

5

5

5 5

55

22

5 5

5

4+n

4+n

5

5

5

5

5

2

11+k(n+1)

8+n8+n

14+n14+n

TCTC

TC

2 x 82Ω 1/4W 2 x 82Ω 1/4W


BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS


Each column is also connected to its own secondary outdoor station(Mod. Sinthesi or Mod. K-Steel)

SV102-3094D

(VX.014)

(C4.007)(C4.008)

(C4.014)

(VX.021a)

(VX.006)

(VX.021a)

(VX.021b)(VX.008)

(C4.008)(C4.007)

(CU.009)(C4.017)

(VX.014)

(VX.008)

(CU.009)(C4.017)

(VX.008)

~0~12

11

14C1

8

5

9

SN2

SN12

36

C2

12

10

7

2 x 821/4W

R1R2

BA

R2R1

BA

R2R1

R2R1

AB

R2R1

BA

R1R2

IVII

I III

A

A B

B

G/T

U2U3U4

U1

G/T~12~0

~12~0

U4U3U2U1

~0~12

G/T

G/T

C1C2C3C4

1 4

1 4

~0~12

~0~12

U3U2

~0~12G/T

G/TU1

U4

MAIN ~

(VD.002)

G/T

U2U3U4

U1

G/T~12~0

~12~0

R1R2

CA

AB

LINE ~

~0~12

U3U2

~0~12G/T

G/TU1

U4

G/T

U2U3U4

U1

G/T~12~0

~12~0

R1R2 BA

I

R2R1 BA

R1R2

BA

R2R1

AB

R1R2

AB

R1R2

AB

IV

II

III

0

230

P2

P1

GNDoutV

K-Steel Sinthesi

1/~~

5

1/~

3

45

2

PS3

SE

PS

~

1/~1

+TC +TCR1

AABB

R1

~12~0

F FSNSN

x

~

TC

R1R2

CA

AB

~0

~

~

~12

R1R2

BA

R2R1

BA

R2R1

R2R1

AB

R2R1

BA

R1R2

IVII

I III

A

A B

B

R1R2

CA

AB

~1/~

2

1

3

5SNFPS4

~

R1R2

CA

AB

~

R2

1/~

~12~0

R1

-6+6

+R

SE1

R1R2

+TCPS

AP

SE2SE3

~

~~~~012

~~~~12

R1R2

CA

AB

~0~12

U3U2

~0~12G/T

G/TU1

U4

U4U3U2U1

~0~12

G/T

G/T

C1C2C3C4

1 4

1 4

~0~12

2 x 82 -1/4W


AS 1ST COLUMN

Output

Input

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

Output

Input

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR



BUTTON MODULECONVERSATIONPRIVACY DEVICE

To the followingconversationprivacy device

Name taglighting

Name taglighting

LockRelease

ELECTRICLOCK

AMPLIFIED LOUDSPEAKING UNIT

ADDITIONAL POWERSUPPLY UNIT

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

LINE

Output

Input

Calls

TO THE FOLLOWINGCOLUMN

BOXRELAY

VIDEO POWERSUPPLY


BUTTON MODULE

TRANSFORMER

LINE~LINE

Name taglighting

Name taglightingLock

Release

ELECTRICLOCK


UNIT



R1R2

CA

AB

R1R2

CA

AB

R1R2

CA

AB

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

CONNECTION OF 4 VIDEO DOOR PHONES TO 1 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATION(Mod. Sinthesi or Mod. K-Steel)

The video door unit calls the 4 video door phones in parallel with switch-on at the same time

FUNCTION

This system allows the connection of a column of video door phones to 4 video outdoor stations with automatic switching. Therefore, it is suitable for a building with 4 entrances common to all apartments. When a visitor presses a call button on one of the two push button panels, in the called apartment the bitonal electronic call is sent to the corresponding video door phone loudspeaker and the image appears on the screen after about 7 seconds.

EQUIPMENT





TC



or




N. 1 Video power supply Ref. 789/5BN. 1 Supplementary power supply Ref. 789/3N. X Video distributor Ref. 955/40

DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

V5.001 VD.002 VX.008

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

2 x 82Ω 1/4W

9

8

2

6

6

5

5

TC

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

CONNECTION OF 4 VIDEO DOOR PHONES TO 1 VIDEO OUTDOOR STATION(Mod. Sinthesi or Mod. K-Steel)

The video door unit calls the 4 video door phones in parallel with switch-on at the same time

(VX.008)

(VX.008)

1/~~

R1

C1

SE

Sinthesi

1/~

R1

1/~~

K-Steel

C1

BBA A

F5

PS4PS

5F

4

G/TG/T

SNSN

+TC +TC

~12~0

SE

1/~1/~

V2

R2 inR1

RL

~

~

R1R2 out

R3

R1

CA

A

R2

B

RD

TC

GCA

AB

RD

R2R1

(VD.002)

II

B B

IVAA

AIII

BAB

I

R1R2R2R1

R1R2R2R1

BA R2R1

A B R2R1

2 x 82 1/4W

~12SE2R2

~0

~

1/~

R1

R1R2

+R

SE1

AP-6+6

PS

+TC

~

POWER SUPPLY

LINE~

Output

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

Input

VIDEOPOWER SUPPLY

LINE~ELECTRIC

LOCK

Lock Release

RD

G

R1

CA

A

R2

B

RD

G

R1

CA

A

R2

B

SV102-3166C

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

FUNCTION

The 5-wire video door phone system implements conversation privacy, call and door opener functions in normal door phone systems with only 5 wires in the riser column: 4 commons + 1 single for each device.The door unit is powered with only two wires and a transformer at 12V~.The most interesting application of a 5-wire system is in old buildings where a door phone system is already fi tted. The existing system can be transformed into a video door phone system without adding wires to the column or in the apartments.Specifi c conversation privacy circuits must be fi tted in the panel for ensuring conversation privacy for all video door phones in the system (one for each button). All video door phones are normally deactivated (no sound is heard when the handset is picked up); only the video door phone called from the door can start the conversation. No other users can cut into the call. The voice circuit of the called video door phone remains activate until the following call is made from the panel to another device.The door opening function is connected to conversation privacy; this means that a user must be called to be able to open the electrical lock.


(Mod. Sinthesi)

EQUIPMENT




or

Modello Utopia N. X Video door phone Ref. 1703/1N. X Bracket Ref. 1703/955


TC

Sinthesi modelN. X Button modules Ref. 1145/11-/12-/13-/14N. 1 Module camera Ref. 1745/40N. 1 Video adapter Ref. 1742/13AN. 1 Module with door unit set-up Ref. 1145/20-/21N. 1 Amplifi ed door unit Ref. 1145/67N. X/4 Conversation privacy device Ref. 1145/74



N. 1 Video power supply Ref. 789/5BN. X Video distributor Ref. 955/40

DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)

CU.009 V5.001 VU.002 VX.006 VX.008 VX.014

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

2 10+n

4+n

4+n

4+n

4+n

4+n

4+n

4+n 4+n

4+n4+n

2 x 82Ω 1/4W

TC

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

SV102-3122E

(VX.006)

(VU.002)

(CU.009)

(VX.008)

(VX.014)

TC

~

~12~0

~

2 x 82 1/4W

A

R2

R2

A

II

R1

IV

B

R1

B

B

III

R2

A

R1

R1

B

A

R2

A R1

A

R2

R2R1B

B

I

14

14U4U3U2U1

C4~0~12

C1G/T

C3

G/T

C2~0~12

R1R2

CA

AB

R1R2

CA

AB

R1R2

CA

AB

R1R2

CA

AB

R1R2

CA

AB

R1R2

CA

AB

A

R2

R2

A

II

R1

IV

B

R1

B

B

III

R2

A

R1

R1

B

A

R2

A R1

A

R2

R2R1B

B

I

C2

F54

~2

1

PS

1/~

SN

G/T3

U1

C1

R1R2

CA

AB

R1R2+TCR1

-6+R

+6

~

~

~0

PS

R2

SE2APSE1

1/~

~12

R1R2

CA

AB

R1+TC

BAR2

T

Output

Input

VIDEODISTRIBUTORRef.955/40

Output

Input



LINE~

Name taglighting



BUTTONS MODULE


privacy devices


Name taglighting

TV CAMERA UNIT

AMPLIFIED LOUDSPEAKING UNIT

ELECTRIC LOCK

LockRelease

LINE~ VIDEOPOWER SUPPLY


(Mod. Sinthesi)

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

SV102-3239: CONNECTION OF 1 VIDEO DOOR PHONE AND 1 DOOR PHONETO 1 RISING COLUMN. SINGLE CALLS

SV102-1710D: CONNECTION OF ONE DOOR PHONE IN PARALLEL TO 1 VIDEO DOOR PHONE

SV102-1712F: CONNECTION OF TWO VIDEO DOOR PHONES IN PARALLEL

SV102-1710D

SV102-1712F

Ref.955/40

FROM RISING COLUMN

calls

2x 82 1/4W

B R1R2A

Output

Input

A

R2

R2

A

IIIII

B

B

B

IV

A

R1

R1

B

A

R1R2

R2R1

B

R1R2

A

A

R2

B

R1

I

R1R2

CA

AB

2

CA11

VIDEODISTRIBUTOR

SV102-3239

1

2

CA1

R1R2

CA

AB

A A

I

B

B

BA

B

A

B

R2R1

A

A

R1

B

R2

IV

II

III

R1R2 R2

R1

R1R2 R2

R1

EQUIPMENTIN PARALLEL

FROM COLUMN


Singlecall COMMONS

Input

Output

A A

II

B

B

BA

B

A

B

R2R1

A

A

R1

B

R2

R1R1R2 R2

R1R1R2 R2

IVI

III

0

230

R2

in

RL

R2

out

V2

R1

CA

AB

R1R2

CA

AB

R1R2

EQUIPMENTIN PARALLEL

FROM COLUMN


Singlecall COMMONS

Input

Output

LINE~

POWER SUPPLYRef.789/2

(VX.008)

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

SV102-1470C

LINE~

S3S1

C6

~012~ A A

I

B

B

BA

B

A

B

R2R1

A

A

R1

B

R2

IV

II

III

R1R2 R2

R1

R1R2 R2

R1

~12

~0

~~

R1R2

CA

AB

FROM COLUMN

Singlecall COMMONS

Input

Output

CHIME12 V~

CALLREPEATER RELAYRef.788/52

TRANSFORMERRef.9000/230(VX.008)


SV102-1470C: CONNECTION OF A CALL REPEATER RELAY Ref. 788/52FOR OPERATING ADDITIONAL RINGER

SV102-3240: CONNECTION OF A CALL REPEATER RELAY Ref. 788/22FOR OPERATING ADDITIONAL RINGER

SV102-3238: EXAMPLE OF CONNECTION FOR RELEASING DOOR LOCKDURING A CALL BY THE VIDEO DOOR PHONE

(VX.008)

Ref.9000/230TRANSFORMER

2x 82 1/4W

~12 0

~~~

A A

I

B

B

BA

B

A

B

R2R1

A

A

R2

B

R1

IV

II

III

R1R2 R2

R1

R1R2 R2

R1

LINE~

CH-CH+

CNA

R1R2

CA

AB

~

~12

B R2R1A

RINGERRef.9854/40

CALLREPEATER RELAYRef.788/22

calls

FROM RISING COLUMN

Input

Output


SV102-3240

SV102-3238

ELECTRICALLOCK TIMERRef.1032/81

SWITCHNNF

(C4.023)(VX.021)

-/~SE2

+24+12/~-/~

NC

APNOC

CA

AB

R1R2

A

I

BA

B

B

R2R1

A

A

R1

B

R2

IV

II

III

R1R2

R2R1

B

R1

A

R2

B

R1

A

R2

MAIN~

~0

230

~12

0

NC

CH-CH+

0LNA

+L+

CCALL

REPEATER RELAYRef.788/22


FROM COLUMN

Singlecall COMMONS

Input

Output


BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

S


DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

MS

SV102-2978C

EXAMPLE OF SIGNAL A, SIGNAL B AND POWER (R1, R2) DISTRIBUTION ON SEVERAL COLUMNS

955/40

R1

A B R1R2

R2A B R1

R2

BA

BA

R2R1

BA

R2R1

BA

R2R1

I

II

IV

III

R1

A B R1R2

R2A B R1

R2

BA

BA

R2R1

BA

R2R1

BA

R2R1

I

II

IV

III

R1

A B

R2

BA

BA

R2R1

BA

R2R1

BA

R2R1

I

II

IV

III

R2R1

A BR1R2

R1R2

R1

A B R2R1

R2A B R1

R2

AB

BA

R2R1

BA

R2R1

BA

R2R1

Input

I II

IVIII

2 x 82Ohm 1/4W

2 x 82Ohm 1/4W2 x 82Ohm 1/4W

R1

A B

R2

BA

BA

R2R1

BA

R2R1

BA

R2R1

I

II

IV

III

R1R2

A BR1R2

TC

Output

Input


Output

Input


Output

Input


Output

Input


Output

VIDEOPOWER SUPPLY

VIDEO OUTDOOR



The video power unit Ref. 789/5B can power up to 8 video distributors Ref. 955/40 if Atlantico, or Scaitel monitors are not installed in parallel in the system.The closing resistors must not be present on the video door phone brackets.

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

FO

R U

RM

ET

DO

MU

S D

EV

ICE

INT

ER

CH

AN

GE

AB

ILIT

YB

AS

IC S

YS

TE

M D

IAG

RA

MS

sec.1f−−−− 1DOOR PHONE - VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS: Installation Diagrams

INSTRUCTIONS FOR URMET DOMUS DEVICE INTERCHANGEABILITY

SECTION 1F(REV.B)


BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

SIN

ST

RU

CT

ION

S F

OR

UR

ME

T D

OM

US

DE

VIC

E IN

TE

RC

HA

NG

EA

BIL

ITY

2 −−−− sec.1f DOOR PHONE - VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS: Installation Diagrams

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

FO

R U

RM

ET

DO

MU

S D

EV

ICE

INT

ER

CH

AN

GE

AB

ILIT

YB

AS

IC S

YS

TE

M D

IAG

RA

MS


INTERCHANGEABLE DEVICES

INTERCHANGEABLE DEVICES

Some devices replace previous models and may be used as spare parts.The correspondence between versions is:

(*) Not available in Italy.

786/1 786/11 23

786/5A 786/15 4

786/14 786/11 or 786/12 (*) 23

787/4 786/4 7

789 789/1A 6

789 789/5B 6

789/1A 789/5B 6

1840/22 1090/850 7

4340/20 752/20 8

7073 789/1A 9

7073/1 789/1A 9

7073/2 789/1A 9

7073/5A 789/2 16

9006/1 786/11 12

9006/2 786/11 12

9006/3 786/3A 14

9006/5 786/15 5

9006/14 786/11 or 786/12 (*) 12

9006/22 786/11 or 786/12 (*) 12

9008/14 786/38A 14

788/1 788/51 16

788/5 788/52 17

788/4 788/54 19

788/8 788/58 18

788/11 788/52 15

788/21 788/52 15

788/30 788/52 17

4330/31 788/51 16

4340/11 788/52 15

4520/10 788/52 15

9330 (II series) 788/52 17

9332/1 788/51 16

9332/5 788/52 17

9332/8 788/58 18

9000/20 9000/230 or 9000/110 (*) 18

1201/1 Ranger 1702/1 Atlantico 20

1201/10 1702/1 Atlantico 20

1704/1 Sentry 1705/1 Artico 22

1704/1A Sentry+ 1705/1 Artico 22

1704/10 Sentry 1705/1 Artico 22

1704/10A Sentry+ 1705/1 Artico 22

1704/90 1704/102 22

1704/955 1704/102 22

4340/23 752/23 8

7081/1 Vedette 1704/20 Sentry+ 20

7091/1 Sentinel 1704/20 Sentry+ 20

7101/1 Explorer 1704/20 Sentry+ 20

5150/500 1128/500 14

PREVIOUS MODEL SEE PAGENEW MODEL

POWER UNITS

RELAY DEVICES

TRANSFORMERS

DOOR UNITS

APARTMENTSTATIONS

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

SIN

ST

RU

CT

ION

S F

OR

UR

ME

T D

OM

US

DE

VIC

E IN

TE

RC

HA

NG

EA

BIL

ITY


REPLACING RELAY POWER UNIT Ref. 786/5A AND Ref. 9006/5 WITH Ref. 786/15

The 786/15 relay power unit can replace the following obsolete models:• Ref. 9006/5• Ref. 786/38A

Follow the following diagrams according to the type of system in which the power unit is being replaced for correct connection.

ELECTRONIC CALL INTERCOM SYSTEMS AND DOOR UNIT


2 9 SN235 PS SN1-J ~12~06 PS27 81 + C14- C2

C1 SN21A ~12-P1P 2 C22P +- PS SN1-J 61 ~0 ~18Ref.786/5A

Ref.786/15

With single calls from door unit and door phones without buzzer.

With single call from door unit and door phones with buzzer.

With single calls from door unit and door phones with buzzer (differential call)

Ref.786/5A

Ref.786/15

PS~02P -P SN11P 6 C2-1 SN2 ~181A 2 C1-J ~12+

6 ~121 + SN25 - PS C1C2 PS282 -J 7 SN13 9 ~04

Ref.786/15

Ref.786/5A

-J PS21 SN2+ 4 PS7- ~12 SN1~0 C2832 C195 6

C11A SN2C2- -P+2 2P ~18~0-J 6 PS1P1 ~12 SN1

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

FO

R U

RM

ET

DO

MU

S D

EV

ICE

INT

ER

CH

AN

GE

AB

ILIT

YB

AS

IC S

YS

TE

M D

IAG

RA

MS



TRADITIONAL CALL INTERCOM SYSTEMS AND DOOR UNIT

With single calls from door unit and door phones with buzzer.

Ref.786/5A 1A ~0 C1 C2+ ~181 ~12- PS2 -P 62P SN1-J1P SN2

C2 SN1~01 4+- PS2 SN2PS C126 75 -J3 9 8 ~12Ref.786/15

1 ~01P +6 ~18SN262 -62P ~12 SN1Ref.9006/5

C2 SN1~01 4+- PS2 SN2PS C126 75 -J3 9 8 ~12Ref.786/15

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

SIN

ST

RU

CT

ION

S F

OR

UR

ME

T D

OM

US

DE

VIC

E IN

TE

RC

HA

NG

EA

BIL

ITY


REPLACING VIDEO DOOR PHONE POWER UNIT Ref. 789 WITH Ref. 789/1A

REPLACING VIDEO DOOR PHONE POWER UNIT Ref. 789 AND Ref. 789/1A WITH Ref. 789/5B

REPLACING VIDEO DOOR PHONE POWER UNIT Ref. 789 WITH Ref. 789/1A

The 789/1A power unit can replace the obsolete 789 model.The terminals correspond as follows:

REPLACING VIDEO DOOR PHONE POWER UNIT Ref. 789 AND Ref. 789/1A WITH Ref. 789/5B

The 789/5B video power unit has the following characteristics:1) It must be powered at 230 V exclusively.

2) It can only be used in video door phone systems with electronic call system (it only has a PS output, no SN output).

3) It can power only two video door phones in stand-by mode (V2).

4) It can power up to 10 video distributors.

5) It is not provided with a -J output for intercom service.

It can therefore replace the Ref. 789 and Ref. 789/1A power units only in systems with the characteristics and limitations above.In these cases, the terminals correspond as follows:

SV102-1814B

Ref. 789 Ref. 789/1A

-

230

~0

~12

~A

~B

+6

-6

PS

SN

1/~

R1

R2

+TC

0

110

230

~0

~12

~A

~B

PS

-6

+6

SN

R1

1/~

R2

+TC

0

OUTPUTS

POWER

AP

SE1

SE2

+6J

-J

AP

SE1

+6J

SE2

-J

MAINS ~

MAINS ~

VOLTAGEUNIT

ELECTRONICUNIT

POWER SUPPLYRef.789/5B

(230V)

POWER SUPPLY Ref.789(230V)

Ref.789/1(110/230V)

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

FO

R U

RM

ET

DO

MU

S D

EV

ICE

INT

ER

CH

AN

GE

AB

ILIT

YB

AS

IC S

YS

TE

M D

IAG

RA

MS


REPLACING DOOR PHONE POWER UNIT Ref. 1840/22 WITH Ref. 1090/850



The 1090/850 power unit can replace the obsolete 1840/22 model.The terminals correspond as follows:


The Ref. 786/4 power unit can replace the obsolete Ref. 787/4 model.The terminals correspond as follows:

Ref. 1840/22 Ref. 1090/850

~230

~24

~24

+ (12)

- (12)

-

-

0

~230

Not available

Not available

Vout

GND

P1

P2

0

OUTPUTS

POWER

Notes

-

(#)

(#)

-

-

(#) If a 24Vac output is needed, use a transformer with minimum output current of 0.2 Aac(∗) because the device 1840/22 actually outputs approximate 14.3 Vdc

Remove the jumper between

terminals P1 and P2 (*)

Ref. 787/4 Ref. 786/4

110

230

~0

~12

+6

-6

-J

PS

PS1

1/~

SN

NA

NC

C

0

110

230

~0

~12

+6

-6

PS1

PS

-J

1/~

NA

SN

NC

C

0

OUTPUTS

POWER

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

SIN

ST

RU

CT

ION

S F

OR

UR

ME

T D

OM

US

DE

VIC

E IN

TE

RC

HA

NG

EA

BIL

ITY


REPLACING DOOR PHONE TWO-CHANNEL SYSTEM POWER UNIT Ref. 4340/20 WITH Ref. 752/20

REPLACING TWO-CHANNEL SYSTEM DOOR PHONE APARTMENT STATION Ref. 4340/23 WITH Ref. 752/23

REPLACING DOOR PHONE TWO-CHANNEL SYSTEM POWER UNIT Ref. 4340/20 WITH Ref. 752/20

REPLACING TWO-CHANNEL SYSTEM DOOR PHONE APARTMENT STATION Ref. 4340/23 WITH Ref. 752/23

The Ref. 752/20 power unit can replace the obsolete Ref. 4340/20 model.The Ref. 752/23 two-channel door phone apartment station replaces the Ref. 4340/23 model.The correspondence between device terminals is shown in the following diagram.

SC101-0211B

(VX.014)

-/~+/~

(VX.006)

(VD.007)

(VD.007)

(C4.009)(C4.009)(C4.009)

(C4.007)

~

~12

~

~021

~0~12

G/T

~0~12

G/T U4U3U2U1

G/TU1

LG/T2

U2

~12~0

-+M+

ELECTRIC LOCK ELECTRIC LOCK ELECTRIC LOCK

twistedcoupledwires

twistedcoupledwires

twistedcoupled wires

To bulb

transformer

To bulb

transformer

To bulbtransformer

4340/27 PANELAND DOOR UNIT

KOMBI FREE-HANDS PANELAND DOOR UNIT

TO THEFOLLOWINGMODULE

Name taglighting

PUSHBUTTONSMODULE

Loudspeakermodule

Microphonemodule

INDOOR SET Ref.4340/23

INDOOR SETRef.752/23TO THE FOLLOWING INDOOR SETS

POWER SUPPLY Ref.752/20


MAINS ~MAINS ~

LockRelease

TRANSFORMER

MAIN ~

Name taglighting

C4.009 - IMPORTANT Use cord pairs.

VD.007 = Floor call button.

C4.007 - Sinthesi models only:See instruction booklet provided withproduct for connecting terminals G/T,~0 and ~12 between modules.

VX.014 - Dusk switch or similar devicefor switching lights on, whererelevant.

VX.006 - See the instruction bookprovided with the product for fittingthe accessory in the device.

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

FO

R U

RM

ET

DO

MU

S D

EV

ICE

INT

ER

CH

AN

GE

AB

ILIT

YB

AS

IC S

YS

TE

M D

IAG

RA

MS


REPLACING VIDEO DOOR PHONE POWER UNIT Ref. 7073, Ref. 7073/1 AND Ref. 7073/2 WITH Ref. 789/1A


The Ref. 789/1 A power unit replace the previous Ref. 7073, Ref. 7073/1 and Ref. 7073/2 power units in all systems except for:

1) Systems with Vidicon camera: Mod. 789 power units are not provided with + LA, -LA outputs for powering lamps.

2) Continuously powered systems.

3) Systems with more than 20 video door phones monitors in stand-by: in this case use a 6 Vdc power unit providing suitable output current considering that the average consumption of a video door phone in stand-by is 60 mAcc.

4) Systems with simultaneous operation of 2 or more video door phones: in this case, power each supplementary video door phone using local power unit Ref. 789/2.

5) The Ref. 789/1 video power unit (110-230V) consists of two units connected using the specifi c wire and plugs (C).

The power unit Ref. is 789/101 (110-230V).The electronic unit Ref. is 789/102.

Jumpers ~0, ~A and ~12, ~B are pre-fi tted.

+

POWER SUPPLYRef.789/1(110/230V)

VIDEOPOWER SUPPLYRef.7073 OR

7073/1

VIDEOPOWER SUPPLYRef.7073/2

CALLGENERATORRef.787/1


MAINS ~

MAINS ~

MAINS ~

MAINS ~

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

SIN

ST

RU

CT

ION

S F

OR

UR

ME

T D

OM

US

DE

VIC

E IN

TE

RC

HA

NG

EA

BIL

ITY



SCOUT AND CAMERA SYSTEMS (CCD CAMERA ONLY)

The Ref. 787/1 tone generator is not used because it is replaced by a generator inside the Ref. 789/1 A power unit.Connect jumpers SE1, ~12 during installation.

SV102-0583A

SENTINEL, EXPLORER AND RANGER AND CAMERA SYSTEMS (CCD CAMERA ONLY)

SV102-0582A

POWER SUPPLYRef.789/1A(110/230V)

MAINS ~ MAINS ~

VOLTAGEUNIT

ELECTRONICUNIT


LOCKRELEASE

ELECTRICLOCK

CCD TV CAMERA UNIT

PUSH BUTTON

PANEL

L.U.

TV CAMERA UNIT

TONEGENERATORRef.787/1

POWER SUPPLYRef.789/1A(110/230V)

MAINS ~

MAINS ~

VOLTAGEUNIT

ELECTRONICUNIT


LOCKRELEASE ELECTRIC

LOCK

CCD TV CAMERA UNIT

PUSH BUTTON

PANEL

L.U.

TV CAMERA UNIT

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

FO

R U

RM

ET

DO

MU

S D

EV

ICE

INT

ER

CH

AN

GE

AB

ILIT

YB

AS

IC S

YS

TE

M D

IAG

RA

MS


SENTINEL, EXPLORER AND RANGER WITH SWITCHBOARD AND CAMERA SYSTEMS (CCD CAMERA ONLY)

Cut the existing jumpers between terminals ~ A, ~0 and between ~B, ~12 of the Ref. 789/1A power unit during installation.SV102-0584A

SENTINEL, EXPLORER AND RANGER AND CAMERA SYSTEMS (VIDICON CAMERA)

The Ref. 789/1A power unit is not provided with +LA and -LA outputs. An auxiliary ~24 V transformer, minimum 24 W (not included), and Ref. 788/5 control relay is needed to power the lights.

SV102-0655A


POWER SUPPLYRef.789/1A (110/230V)


MAINS ~

MAINS ~

MAINS ~

VOLTAGEUNIT

ELECTRONICUNIT

VIDEOPOWER SUPPLY Ref.7073/1

LOCKRELEASE

ELECTRICLOCK

CCD TV CAMERA UNIT

PUSH BUTTON

PANEL

L.U.

TV CAMERA UNIT

NOTE

COMMONSSINGLES

STANDARDHOUSE

SWITCHBOARD

POWER SUPPLYRef.789/1(110/230V)


MAINS ~

MAINS ~

MAINS ~

VOLTAGEUNIT

ELECTRONICUNIT

ELECTRICLOCK

PUSH BUTTON

PANEL

L.U.

TV CAMERA UNIT

LOCKRELEASE

VIDICON TYPETV CAMERA

TRANSFORMER24V~ 25W

RELAYRef.9332/5

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

SIN

ST

RU

CT

ION

S F

OR

UR

ME

T D

OM

US

DE

VIC

E IN

TE

RC

HA

NG

EA

BIL

ITY


REPLACING DOOR PHONE POWER UNITS Ref. 9006/1, 9006/2, 9006/14 AND 9006/22 WITH Ref. 786/11

The Ref. 786/11 power unit can replace the following obsolete models:• Ref. 9006/1• Ref. 9006/2• Ref. 9006/14• Ref. 9006/22

The terminals correspond as follows:

(∗) Not available in Italy.(#) If a 18Vac output is needed, use a transformer with minimum output current of 0.5 Aac and connect as shown in the attached diagram:


Ref. 9006/1 Ref. 786/11

~220

~0

~12

+6

-6

-J

~0

~230

~0

~12

+6

-6

-J

0

OUTPUTS

POWER

Ref. 9006/2 Ref. 786/11

~220

~0

~12

+6

-6

~0

~230

~0

~12

+6

-6

0

OUTPUTS

POWER

Ref. 9006/14 Ref. 786/11

~110

~220

~240

~0

~12

~18

+6

-6

-J

~0

Not available

~230

Not available

~0

~12

Not available

-J

-6

+6

0

Ref. 786/12 (∗)

~110

Not available

Not available

~0

~12

Not available

Notes

(#)

-J

-6

+6

0

OUTPUTS

POWER

MAINS~

MAINS~

18Vca

-J-6+6

~0~12

~

~

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

FO

R U

RM

ET

DO

MU

S D

EV

ICE

INT

ER

CH

AN

GE

AB

ILIT

YB

AS

IC S

YS

TE

M D

IAG

RA

MS




Ref. 9006/22 Ref. 786/11

~110

~220

~240

~0

~12

~24

+6

-6

-J

~0

Not available

~230

Not available

~0

~12

Not available

-J

-6

+6

0

Ref. 786/12 (∗)

~110

Not available

Not available

~0

~12

Not available

Notes

(#)

-J

-6

+6

0

OUTPUTS

POWER

24Vca

-J-6+6

~0~12

~

~

MAINS~

MAINS~

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

SIN

ST

RU

CT

ION

S F

OR

UR

ME

T D

OM

US

DE

VIC

E IN

TE

RC

HA

NG

EA

BIL

ITY


REPLACING SWITCHBOARD SYSTEM POWER UNIT Ref. 9006/3 WITH Ref. 786/3A

REPLACING DOOR PHONE POWER UNIT Ref. 9008/14 WITH Ref. 786/38A

REPLACING DOOR UNIT Ref. 5150/500 WITH Ref. 1128/500

REPLACING SWITCHBOARD SYSTEM POWER UNIT Ref. 9006/3 WITH Ref. 786/3A

The Ref. 786/3A power unit can replace the obsolete 9006/3 model.The terminals correspond as follows:

REPLACING DOOR PHONE POWER UNIT Ref. 9008/14 WITH Ref. 786/38A

The Ref. 786/38A power unit can replace the obsolete 9008/14 model.The terminals correspond as follows:

REPLACING DOOR UNIT Ref. 5150/500 WITH Ref. 1128/500

Ref. 9006/3 Ref. 786/3

~110

~220

~240

~0

~12

-15

+15

~0

Not available

~230

Not available

~0

~12

-15

+15

0

OUTPUTS

POWER

Ref. 9008/14 Ref. 786/38A

~110

~220

~240

~0

~12

~18

+6

-6

-J

~0

~110

~230

Not available

~0

~12

~18

-J

-6

+6

0

OUTPUTS

POWER

Ref. 5150/500 Ref. 1128/500

-

1

1A

2

+

-

1

1A

2

+

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

FO

R U

RM

ET

DO

MU

S D

EV

ICE

INT

ER

CH

AN

GE

AB

ILIT

YB

AS

IC S

YS

TE

M D

IAG

RA

MS


REPLACING RELAY BOXES Ref. 788/21, Ref. 788/11, Ref. 4340/11 AND Ref. 4520/10 WITHRef. 788/52

The 788/52 relay box can replace the following obsolete models:• Ref. 788/11• Ref. 788/21• Ref. 4340/11• Ref. 4520/10

The terminals correspond as follows:

REPLACING RELAY BOXES Ref. 788/21, Ref. 788/11, Ref. 4340/11 AND Ref. 4520/10 WITH Ref. 788/21

Ref. 788/11 Ref. 788/52

~12 - R1 - 1

2 - 7

~0

CA

C

6

S1

2

0~

CA

S1

6

C

12~

S2 - S3 S3

Ref. 4340/11 Ref. 788/52

~12

~0

CA

6

S1

12~

0~

S1

6

CA

S3 S3

Ref. 788/21 Ref. 788/52

~12 (R1-1)

C

CA

0~

6

12~

C

6

0~

CA

2-7 2

S1

S2

S3

S4

S5

S1

S2

S5

S4

S3

S6 S6

Ref. 4520/10 Ref. 788/52

R1

7

2

1

S1

15

S1

2

2

15

S2 S3

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

SIN

ST

RU

CT

ION

S F

OR

UR

ME

T D

OM

US

DE

VIC

E IN

TE

RC

HA

NG

EA

BIL

ITY


REPLACING RELAY BOXES Ref. 9332/1, Ref. 4330/31 and Ref. 788/1 WITH Ref. 788/1

REPLACING SUPPLEMENTARY VIDEO DOOR PHONE POWER UNIT Ref. 7073/5A WITH Ref. 789/2

REPLACING RELAY BOXES Ref. 9332/1, Ref. 4330/31 AND Ref. 788/1 WITH Ref. 788/1

The Ref. 788/51 relay box can replace the obsolete 9332/1 model.The terminals correspond as follows:

Note : Terminals C1, C2, ~12 of relay Ref. 788/51 must be connected together by jumpers and connected to ~12.Note ∗: Terminal not present in Ref. 9332/1 and Ref. 788/51. Add power wire ~0.

REPLACING SUPPLEMENTARY VIDEO DOOR PHONE POWER UNIT Ref. 7073/5A WITH Ref. 789/2

The Ref. 789/2 power unit can replace the obsolete Ref. 7073/5 model.The terminals correspond as follows:

Ref. 4330/31 Ref. 9332/1 Ref. 788/1 Ref. 788/51

2P

2S

4P

4

4S

AP/P

AP

AP/S

3P

3

3S

.

.

.

PUL/P

PUL/P

♦ A

B

2

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

15

13

14

SN1

SN2

♦ SN

∗

2

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

15

13

14

SN1

SN2

C1

C2

~12

~0

2

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

15

13

14

SN1

SN2

C1

C2

~12

~0

2

Ref. 7073/5 Ref. 789/2

~110

~230

R2 in

R2 out

RL

R1

V2

0

Not available

~230

R2 in

R2 out

RL

R1

V2

0

OUTPUTS

POWER

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

FO

R U

RM

ET

DO

MU

S D

EV

ICE

INT

ER

CH

AN

GE

AB

ILIT

YB

AS

IC S

YS

TE

M D

IAG

RA

MS


REPLACING RELAY BOX Ref. 9332/5 AND Ref. 788/5 WITH Ref. 788/52

The Ref. 788/52 relay box can replace the obsolete 9332/5 and 788/5 model.The terminals correspond as follows:

REPLACING RELAY BOX Ref. 9330 (II SERIES) AND Ref. 788/30 WITH Ref. 788/52

The Ref. 788/52 relay box can replace the obsolete 9330 II series model (which is not provided with a 150 ohm resistor in series with terminal 12) and 788/30 model.The terminals correspond as follows:



Ref. 9332/5 Ref. 788/5

15

1

2

3

4

5

6

14

15

1

2

3

4

5

6

14

Ref. 788/52

15

S1

S2

S3

S4

S5

S6

14

CONTACTS

RELAY

Ref. 9330 (II series) Ref. 788/30

15

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

14

15

1

2

3

4

5

8

7

6

9

11

10

12

14

CONTACTS

RELAY

Ref. 788/52

15

S1

S2

S3

S4

S5

-

-

S6

-

-

-

-

14

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

SIN

ST

RU

CT

ION

S F

OR

UR

ME

T D

OM

US

DE

VIC

E IN

TE

RC

HA

NG

EA

BIL

ITY



REPLACING 12VAC TRANSFORMER Ref. 9000/20 WITH Ref. 9000/230


The Ref. 788/58 relay box can replace the obsolete 9332/8 and 788/8 model.The terminals correspond as follows:

Note : Terminals C1, C2, ~12 of relay Ref. 788/58 must be connected together by jumpers and connected to ~12.

REPLACING 12VAC TRANSFORMER Ref. 9000/20 WITH Ref. 9000/230

The 9000/230 transformer can replace the obsolete 9000/20 model.The terminals correspond as follows:

(∗) Not available in Italy.

Ref. 9332/8 Ref. 788/8

2

-

AP

1I

2I

-I

API

1II

2II

-II

APII

1III

2III

-III

1

APIII

1IV

-IV

2IV

APIV

SN1

SN2

SN4

SN3

A

B ♦

2

-

AP

1I

2I

-I

2II

1II

API

-II

1III

APII

2III

-III

1

APIII

1IV

-IIV

2IV

APIV

SN1

SN2

SN4

SN3

~0

~12

C1

C2

Ref. 788/58

2

-

AP

1I

2I

-I

2II

1II

API

-II

1III

APII

2III

-III

1

APIII

1IV

-IIV

2IV

APIV

SN1

SN2

SN4

SN3

~0

~12

C1

C2

Ref. 9000/20 Ref. 9000/230

~110

~220

~240

~0

~12

~0

Not available

~230

Not available

~0

~12

0

Ref. 9000/110 (∗)

~110

Not available

Not available

~0

~12

0

OUTPUTS

POWER

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

FO

R U

RM

ET

DO

MU

S D

EV

ICE

INT

ER

CH

AN

GE

AB

ILIT

YB

AS

IC S

YS

TE

M D

IAG

RA

MS




REPLACING RELAY BOX Ref. 788/4 WITH Ref. 788/54

The Ref. 788/54 relay box can replace the obsolete 788/4 model.The terminals correspond as follows:

GND GND

IN H IN H

~B ~B

~A ~A

+TC +TC

R2 R2

R1 R1

9 9

6 6

R2 R2

R1 R1

V5 V5

V3 V3

2 2

1 1

+6 +6

-6 -6

+TC +TC

R1 R1

V5 V5

V3 V3

2 2

1 1

SE SE

~0 ~0

~12 ~12

C1 C1

SN1 SN1

C2 C2

SN2 SN2

C3 C3

SN3 SN3

C4 C4

SN4 SN4

~12 ~12

~0 ~0

+6 +6

-6 -6

AP AP

SE SE

Ref. 788/4 Ref. 788/54

POWER

COLUMN

INPUT(A, B, C, D)

POWER

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

SIN

ST

RU

CT

ION

S F

OR

UR

ME

T D

OM

US

DE

VIC

E IN

TE

RC

HA

NG

EA

BIL

ITY


REPLACEMENT OPTIONS FOR RANGER, EXPLORER, VEDETTE AND SENTINEL IN TRADITIONAL CALL SYSTEM VIDEO DOOR PHONES SYSTEMS


RANGER VIDEO DOOR PHONES

WINFLAT+ BRACKET Ref. 1202/590 FOR ADAPTING COAX VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMSRanger video door phones Ref. 1201/1 (and respective brackets Ref. 1201/90) can be replaced in traditional call video door phone systems with Atlantico video door phones Ref. 1702/1 and specifi c bracket Ref. 1202/590.The terminals on Ref. 1202/590 brackets have the same numbers as the Ref. 1201/90 brackets to replace simply by connecting the wires in the same way.Note that the replacement is only possible in systems fi tting Ranger basic model Ref. 1201/1 with bracket Ref. 1201/90. It is not possible in systems with switchboard, special systems and intercom systems because bracket Ref. 1202/590 is not suitable for replacing special brackets Ref. 1201/91, Ref. 1201/761, Ref. 1201/711, Ref. 1201/731 and Ref. 1201/751.

WINFLAT+ BRACKET Ref. 1202/591 FOR ADAPTING VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS WITHOUT COAXIAL CABLERanger video door phones Ref. 955/5 with brackets Ref. 955/74 can be replaced in 5-wire systems with Atlantico video door phones Ref. 1702/1 using adapter bracket Ref. 1202/591.Replacement is only possible in basic systems.

EXPLORER, VEDETTE, SENTINEL AND VIDOFONO VIDEO DOOR PHONES

SENTRY VIDEO DOOR PHONE WITH BRACKET Ref. 1704/20A FOR ADAPTING EXPLORER, VEDETTE, SENTINEL AND VIDOFONO SYSTEMSEXPLORER, VEDETTE and SENTINEL video door phones can be replaced with SENTRY+ Ref. 1704/20A video door phones in traditional call video door phone systems.SENTRY+ Ref. 1704/20A is a video door phone with a 4.5” kinescope screen arranged on the longest side in the horizontal direction.The SENTRY+ Ref. 1704/20A bracket terminals have the same numbers as the EXPLORER, VEDETTE, SENTINEL and VIDOFONO terminal boards to simply connect the wires in the same way.This video door phone can be fi tted only in traditional basic systems (with 12Vac call). It is not suitable for use in switchboard or intercom systems because the bracket is not suitable to replace all versions.SENTRY+ Ref. 1704/20A is complete with bracket and white. The monitor is a refl ex version; brightness and contrast can be adjusted by means of the controls. The call signal is sent to the buzzer fi tted on the bracket. The door lock can be released by pressing the “ ” button. The two service buttons “ ” and “ ” can be used to operate accessory circuits.SENTRY+ Ref. 1704/20A video door phones are used to view the picture from a camera arranged to frame a fi eld with the longest side arranged vertically. This arrangement causes a 25 to 30% reduction of the framed fi eld with respect to EXPLORER, VEDETTE, SENTINEL and VIDOFONO video door phones.

Sentry+ video door phone is provided with an additional speaker to considerably increase volume of the call.Connecting the wires to the system is fast via terminal boards on the bracket to which the video door phone is then fi tted.

(C3)(C2)(C5)(C9)(C1)(C4)(C7)

(C10)(C6)(C8)

[1][2][6]

[10][7][9]

[X1][X2][Y1][Y2]

−−−−−−−−−−

−−−−−−−−−−

Sentry+

Sentry+

Ref.1704/20

Vedette,VidofonoSentinel,Explorer

Explorer Sentinel Scout

Vedette Vidofono

RISING COLUMN


INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

FO

R U

RM

ET

DO

MU

S D

EV

ICE

INT

ER

CH

AN

GE

AB

ILIT

YB

AS

IC S

YS

TE

M D

IAG

RA

MS


INSTALLATIONArrange the duct so that it ends in correspondence with the input hole on the bracket and proceed as follows:1) Fasten the bracket to the wall at the height from the fl oor shown by

means of the four screws.2) Connect the wires to the specifi c terminals.3) Extract the retainer hook A by inserting the tip of a screwdriver and

pulling the hook downwards.4) Check that switch on back of video door phone is in the A

position.

5) Fasten the monitor to the bracket.6) Fasten the monitor by pushing the retainer hook A upwards.

The device is provided with the following controls:• One door opening button ( ).• Two service buttons ( and ) which can be used, for example, to switch on the staircase lights, open an additional lock or to implement

automatic switch-on function.• Two potentiometers for adjusting picture brightness ( ) and contrast ( ).• One switch for three-position call tone volume adjustment ( ) (minimum, medium and maximum volume).

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSPower voltage: 16 ÷ 18.5VdcIntake: Working: max. 0.65A Stand-by: 0APower: Working: max. 12WCCIR version: Vertical frequency 50Hz ± 2Hz Horizontal frequency: 15625 ± 400HzEIA version: Vertical frequency 60Hz ± 2Hz Horizontal frequency: 15734 ± 400HzVideo signal: 1Vpp 75Ω nominal 1Vpp. -6 dB minimumKinescope: 4.5” 90° neck 20mmSwitch-on delay: 7” maxX-rays: noneOperating temperature range: -5°÷ + 50°CHumidity: max. 90% RH

TERMINAL BOARD

1 Speaker signal CA Call signal 2 Microphone signal 6 Power ground 10 9 Door opener control X1 Service button terminals X2 Y1 Service button terminals Y2 R3 Silent video on R1 Video power negative R2 Video power positive RT Secondary monitor power positive V4 Composite video signal for second monitor in-out connection (connect a 75Ω resistor between V4 and V5 if not present) V5 Video signal earth V3 Composite video signal

Service button

Service buttonDoor opener button

Brightness adjustmentContrast adjustment

Call volume

99 mm

230

mm

200 mm

A

B

A

Bracket

1,55

m


BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

SIN

ST

RU

CT

ION

S F

OR

UR

ME

T D

OM

US

DE

VIC

E IN

TE

RC

HA

NG

EA

BIL

ITY


REPLACEMENT OF SENTRY VIDEO DOOR PHONES WITH ARTICO Using the bracket without circuit for the Artico video door phone Réf. 1705/100 it is possible to replace the Sentry video door phones in any type of system. Proceed as follows:1. Remove the Sentry video door phone from the bracket.2. Disconnect all conductors from the Sentry bracket terminals.3. Loosen the 4 fastening screws from the wall bracket4. Remove the printed circuit from the Sentry bracket by loosening

the 2 fastening screws (A).

5. Fit the printed circuit on the Artico bracket Ref. 1705/100 using the 2 screws provided (screws B)

6. Fasten the Artico bracket to the wall using the 4 screws fastening the Sentry bracket

7. Reconnect the wires to the specifi c terminals.8. Insert the Artico video door phone on the bracket fastening it with

the hook A.

SENTRY+ BRACKET REPLACEMENT Procure a plastic support Ref.1704/102 and the Artico bracket corresponding to the system in use in the installation to replace a faulty Sentry+ video door phone bracket:• Coax Ref. 1705/90• 5 wires Ref. 1705/955

Then proceed as follows:• Remove the printed circuit from the Artico bracket.

• Fasten the printed circuit on the plastic support Ref. 1704/102.

• Remove the Sentry video door phone from the bracket.• Disconnect all conductors from the Sentry bracket terminals.• Loosen the 4 fastening screws from the wall bracket.• Fasten the plastic support on the printed circuit to the wall.• Reconnect the wires to the specifi c terminals.• Fit the video door phone on the bracket.

Sentry bracket

A

B

Bracket Ref. 1705/100

A

Ref. 1705/1

BracketRef. 1705/100

REPLACEMENT OF SENTRY VIDEO DOOR PHONES WITH ARTICO

SENTRY+ BRACKET REPLACEMENT

Artico bracket

Plastic supportRef. 1704/102

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

FO

R U

RM

ET

DO

MU

S D

EV

ICE

INT

ER

CH

AN

GE

AB

ILIT

YB

AS

IC S

YS

TE

M D

IAG

RA

MS



The Ref. 786/11 power unit can replace the obsolete 786/1 model.


The Ref. 786/11 power unit can replace the obsolete 786/14 model.The terminals correspond as follows:




0

~230

+6

-6

-J

~0

~12

PS

0

~230

+6

-6

-J

~0

~12

PS

Ref. 786/1 Ref. 786/11

POWER

OUTPUTS

0

~230

+6

-6

-J

~0

~18

PS

0

~230

+6

-6

-J

~0

~12~12

(#)

PS

Ref. 786/1 Ref. 786/11

~110 Not available

0

Not available

+6

-6

-J

~0

~12

(#)

PS

Ref. 786/12 (*)

~110

POWER

OUTPUTS

MAINS~

MAINS~

18Vca

-J-6+6

~0~12

~

~

BA

SIC

SY

ST

EM

DIA

GR

AM

SIN

ST

RU

CT

ION

S F

OR

UR

ME

T D

OM

US

DE

VIC

E IN

TE

RC

HA

NG

EA

BIL

ITY


REPLACING SCAITEL VIDE DOOR PHONE

BLACK/WHITE Video door phone

Mod.Scaitel (B)

Ref.1732/1

Mod.Artico (A)

Ref.1705/1

Mod.Atlantico (A)

Ref.1702/1

Bracket Ref.1732/91Ref.1705/90Ref.1202/90

Ref.1132/1Ref.1132/55

COLOUR Video door phone Ref.1732/41--Ref.1702/40

Bracket Ref.1732/91--Ref.1202/90

Ref.1132/1Ref.1132/55

SCAITELVIDEO DOOR PHONE

DOOR PHONEVIDEO MODULE

REPLACING SCAITEL VIDE DOOR PHONE

sec.2 −−−− 1

EASIVOICE

BA

SIC

DIA

GR

AM

SE

AS

IVO

ICE

SY

ST

EM


EASIVOICESYSTEM

SECTION 2(REV.A)


2 −−−− sec.2

SECTION 2 CONTENTS


DO

OR

PH

ON

E A

ND

VID

EO

DO

OR

PH

ON

E S

YS

TE

M -

DIA

GR

AM

- S

ectio

n 2


EASIVOICE

Diagram Sec. Pag.EASIVOICE SYSTEM

ELECTRONIC INTERCOM SYSTEM Mod. 926

SYSTEM FEATURES.............................................................................................................................................................................2 ................3EQUIPMENT ..........................................................................................................................................................................................2 ................3INTERCOM DOOR PHONE FEATURES...............................................................................................................................................2 ................3 Installation ..........................................................................................................................................................................................2 ................3PUSH BUTTON PANEL AND AMPLIFIED LOUDSPEAKING UNIT......................................................................................................2 ................8POWER SUPPLY Ref. 926/2 .................................................................................................................................................................2 ................4 Features .............................................................................................................................................................................................2 ................5 Technical data ....................................................................................................................................................................................2 ................5FUNCTIONS...........................................................................................................................................................................................2 ................5 Single call ...........................................................................................................................................................................................2 ................5 Redial reservation...............................................................................................................................................................................2 ................5 Clearing the line..................................................................................................................................................................................2 ................5 Conference call...................................................................................................................................................................................2 ................6 Follow-me ...........................................................................................................................................................................................2 ................6 General calls (only from authorized intercom door phone).................................................................................................................2 ................6 Answering a call from the outdoor station...........................................................................................................................................2 ................6PROGRAMMING....................................................................................................................................................................................2 ................6INSTALLATION......................................................................................................................................................................................2 ................6 Wires laying ........................................................................................................................................................................................2 ................6 Wire section........................................................................................................................................................................................2 ................7 Connection to the general call unit .....................................................................................................................................................2 ................7 Connection to the call station .............................................................................................................................................................2 ................7 Installations with one call key .............................................................................................................................................................2 ................7 Installations with two or more call keys...............................................................................................................................................2 ................7

BASIC SYSTEM DIAGRAMS

INTERCOM CONNECTION OF MAXIMUM 25 INTERCOM DOOR PHONESPossibility of general call service by means of loudspeakers......................................................................... SC101-0313E ................2 ................8

INTERCOM CONNECTION OF MAXIMUM 97 INTERCOM DOOR PHONESPossibility of general call service by means of loudspeakers......................................................................... SC101-0315E ................2 ............. 10

INTERCOM CONNECTION OF MAXIMUM 16 INTERCOM DOOR PHONESWith possibility to answer to 1 outdoor stationAll the intercom house phones are called in parallel from the outdoor station ..............................................SC101-0316G ................2 ............. 12

INTERCOM CONNECTION OF MAXIMUM 16 INTERCOM DOOR PHONESWith possibility to answer to 1 outdoor station The intercoms are divided in two groups of 8. The outdoor station is equipped with two keys:with one of them it calls in parallel the 8 intercoms of group I, with the second one those of group II ..........SC101-0361G ................2 ............. 14

INTERCOM CONNECTION OF MAXIMUM 16 INTERCOM DOOR PHONESWith possibility to answer to 1 outdoor station. The intercoms are called separately from theoutdoor station.Possibility of paging service by means of loudspeakers ................................................................................ SC101-0382F ................2 ............. 16

EA

SIV

OIC

E S

YS

TE

ME

LE

CT

RO

NIC

INT

ER

CO

M S

YS

TE

M

sec.2 −−−− 3

EASIVOICE


Mo

d. 9

26


Electronic intercom Mod. 926 can be installed in any building for a simple and effi cient phonic communication system capable of supporting several communications simultaneously.

Up to 97 intercom door phone can be interconnected. There is no centralized device to manage the system since each intercom contains the necessary electronics for handling a dialogue with the rest of the installation.

There can be up to four independent communications simultaneously.

A general call can be made through an independent fi fth phonic channel.

Programming is very easy and does not require having to open the intercom door phone.There are two versions of the intercom door phone which can be easily distinguished one from the other by the presence or absence of the door-opener key:• Intercom model Ref. 926/1• Intercom model that can be connected to a loudspeaking unit Ref. 926/2

There are two versions:• Connection to 97 intercoms max. only with intercom service.• Connection to 25 intercoms max. with intercom service and with

possibility of answer to outdoor station.

SYSTEM FEATURES

The following is a summary of system features:• Connection of a maximum of 97 intercom door phones.• Very easy programming of the door phone codes that can be made

directly from outside (of the same door phone).• 4 simultaneous and independent conversations.• Possibility of conference among 4 door phones max.• Possibility of busy line insertion.• Clearing the line (only from an activated door phone).• Possibility to oblige the user to answer.• Possibility to route the call to another door phone (follow-me). This function - if necessary - can be modifi ed for realizing

automatically the “secretary function”.• “Secretary” function, that is the possibility to transfer the incoming

calls from an intercom “x” to a “y” one. Anyway “y” can call “x” and the last one can make outgoing calls.

• Paging function carried out by means of a 5th independent and dedicated line, connected to a loudspeaker by means of an amplifi er (only from activated intercom/s).

• Possibility of connection to an amplifi er able to manage sound and message diffusion with “disk-jockey” function (automatic lowering of the sound diffusion volume during the sounding message).

• Possibility to receive door phone calls from a call station appropriately connected (only for Mod. 926/2).

In case the intercom is already engaged in conversation with another indoor set, the possible call from the outdoor station is signaled both visually and acoustically.

• Automatic lowering of the sound intensity of the beep on the loudspeaker when the handset is unhooked and the hook is pressed with a fi nger.

The system utilizes a single phonic ground conductor, therefore it cannot guarantee absolute secrecy of conversation, i.e. during the course of a conversation, it may be possible to hear another conversation in course on another line (crosstalk effect) at a distance. It will be necessary to adopt appropriate measures to minimize this problem.


SYSTEM FEATURES - EQUIPMENT - INTERCOM DOOR PHONE FEATURES

EQUIPMENT

The device forming part of the system are as follows:• Intercom door phone Ref. 926/1• Intercom door phone and with connection to loudspeaking unit Ref. 926/2• Table kit Ref. 926/4• Power supply for electronic Intercom Ref. 926/3

INTERCOM DOOR PHONE FEATURES

The intercom door phone can either be installed on a wall or on a table. Adaptation kit Ref. 926/4, consisting of an inclined stand to facilitate the use of the intercom itself, is available for table installations.

INSTALLATION

WALL SET

The intercom should be mounted about 1,5m from the fl oor.

To remove the intercom casing from the base, lift up with a screwdriver in the area indicated.Lift off the casing.

Use the screw anchors and screws furnished with the intercom to fasten the base to the wall.

EASIVOICE

about 1,5m

EA

SIV

OIC

E S

YS

TE

ME

LE

CT

RO

NIC

INT

ER

CO

M S

YS

TE

M

4 −−−− sec.2

EASIVOICE


Mo

d. 9

26


PUSH BUTTON PANEL AND AMPLIFIED LOUDSPEAKING UNIT - POWER SUPPLY Ref. 926/3

TABLE SET

For table mounting it is necessary to buy the table kit that includes stand, cord with socket and accessories Ref. 926/4.

Proceed as follows:• Remove the intercom casing by means of a screwdriver in the area

indicated, rotating the cover on the two upper hooks.• Release the two side latches E by pressing them from the inside of

zone F.• Fix the plate under the base by means of the proper screws.• Insert under the base, in the proper holes, the two self adhesive

rubbers (included in the socket kit).• Insert the cord with socket and fi x it to the hook. Then connect the

system wires to the correspondent terminals of the terminal board.

The connection cable wires to the door phone socket wire are very specifi c for table installations. They must be connected to the intercom terminals as follows:MI Black D Yellow+12 Red MF GrayL1 Green L2 BlueL3 Pink L4 BrownL5 White

Connection for the loudspeaking unit (Ref. 926/2 only):CA Yellow-Gray 2 Pink-Black1 Yellow-Black -/~ Black-GrayAP Yellow-Pink

PUSH BUTTON PANEL AND AMPLIFIED LOUDSPEAKING UNIT

The devices normally used in 4+n wire door phone systems can be employed.

POWER SUPPLY Ref. 926/3

This power supply has been designed according to the IEC 12/13 5th Ed. Dec. 1988 International Security Regulations - and is built following the present market requirements, the tendency of which is to centralize the electric equipment in proper cabinets.

Yellow - GrayPink - BlackYellow - BlackBlack - GrayYellow - Pink

BlackYellow

RedGray

GreenBluePink

BrownWhite

162 mm

118 mm

90 mm

75 m

m

45 mm

Sch. 926/3

EASIVOICE

EA

SIV

OIC

E S

YS

TE

ME

LE

CT

RO

NIC

INT

ER

CO

M S

YS

TE

M

sec.2 −−−− 5

EASIVOICE


Mo

d. 9

26


FUNCTIONS

FEATURES

The power supply 926/3 is set for a medium system of 25 intercoms (926/1). In case of systems with more intercoms, connect more power supplies in parallel, up to 4 max. In this case follow carefully the system schemes.

TECHNICAL DATA

• Electrical characteristics Transformer power: 38 VA Powering: 110/230 ~ Secondary voltages:

11.5V 0.6 A 24V 40 mA max. 24V 10 mA max.• Powering 11.5 V section: It supplies powering to the intercoms and max. current of 600 mA;• Phonic line powering section: It includes 5 identic circuits. Each circuit supplies a constant current

of about 30 mA with max. voltage of 24 V;• Data output: It supplies a voltage of 24 V with a resistance series 2.2 K Ω per data

wire.• Amplifi er output: On this output the signal coming from the 5th phonic line is injected

and it is uncoupled by means of condenser. The output circuit includes two schottky diodes with a 150 Ω resistance in parallel.

• Operating temperature: 0° C ÷ 40°C• Dimensions: Length: 162 mm Thickness: 75 mm Width (with side protections): 108 mm Width (without side protections): 90 mm Weight: 0.950 Kg Connections: by means of terminals with clamping screw

FUNCTIONS

All functions can be activated through the 12-key alphanumeric keypad located on the base of the intercom:

The key located on the upper right of Mod. 926/2 is used for opening the door. Other functions (clearing a line, general call) can only be performed from authorized (enabled) intercoms. The activation of these functions can only be done during the programming phase. Please consult the chapter on programming for further information.

SINGLE CALL

CallerTo talk to another intercom station:• Lift the handset.• Dial the TWO DIGIT number of the other-party.• Listen for the tone and observe the led: • Ringing tone: wait for the called party to answer. • Busy tone and led off: the number called is engaged → try again

later or activate the automatic redial function or the clear the line function (if authorized).

• Busy tone and led on: the 4 telephone lines are engaged → try again later.

Called PartyWhen the phone rings, lift up the handset and begin the conversation.At the end of the conversation, if the called party hangs up the handset

1 2 3

6

7 8 9

R 0 F

4 5

NOTE:R = RedialF = Follow-me

the intercom is disconnected from the line and it will communicate, on the data line, the end of the conversation to the caller who, in his turn, will disconnect his intercom physically and logically from the line. The handset will be mute until the hanging up.On the contrary, If the caller hangs up the handset, he will free the line, physically and logically, and he will communicate to the called party the end of conversation. This last one, in his turn, will disconnect the intercom physically.

A conversation cannot last longer than 10 minutes in order to allow other users access to the phone lines. Once this time has lapsed, an acoustic “end-of-conversation warning” signal will be sent to both intercom door phones. The communication will be disconnected 10 seconds after the warning signal.

REDIAL RESERVATION

CallerIf the number called is engaged, an automatic redial reservation can be activated by pressing the “R” key before hanging up. Then listen for the tone:• No tone: automatic redial reservation was accepted → hang up.• Persistent busy tone: automatic redial reservation was not accepted

because the number called already has an automatic redial reserved onto its line from another intercom → hang up and try again later. When the intercom door phone that was reserved to becomes free, the caller who initiated the reservation will automatically receive a call-back.

Attention: there will be situations in which the call-back will not take place. These situations will be described in the “Called Party” section below.

Called PartyDuring the course of a normal conversation, any reservations to the line will be indicated by a blinking led on the intercom. The user who is the subject of a reservation has two courses of action:• He can decide “a priori” to eliminate the reservation by pressing the

“R” key either during the course of the conversation or immediately after hanging up (within 5 seconds).

• He can decide to talk to whoever had reserved by hanging up and waiting for the system to automatically set up the communication and then for his intercom to ring.

If all of the phonic lines are not engaged, this will take place within 5 seconds after hanging up. If, however, all the lines are engaged, the system will attempt to establish the communication every 15 seconds, up to maximum of 10 trials. The reservation will be canceled if the tenth attempt was also unsuccessful.

CLEARING THE LINE

Caller (only from authorized intercom door phones)Lift the handset and dial the number of the called party. If this party is on the line (busy tone is heard and led is off), the line can be “cleared” i.e. the conversation in course can be disconnected. To do so, simply dial the special “00” number. Conversation will be established with the cleared intercom door phone within 20 seconds.

Called PartyA clearing request during the course of a normal conversation will be identifi ed both acoustically and visually (blinking led).At this point, the called party will have 20 seconds in which to terminate the conversation in course.There are two possible courses of action: • Hang up within 20 seconds. The intercom will ring and when the

handset is lifted, communication will be established with the caller who had initiated the “clearing”.

• If the called party does not hang up within 20 seconds, he will be disconnected from his current conversation and connected with the caller who had requested the “clearing”.

The line clearing function WILL HAVE NO EFFECT on another intercom which is also authorized to clear lines or if the intercom is in communication with the outdoor station.

EASIVOICE

EA

SIV

OIC

E S

YS

TE

ME

LE

CT

RO

NIC

INT

ER

CO

M S

YS

TE

M

6 −−−− sec.2

EASIVOICE


Mo

d. 9

26


PROGRAMMING - INSTALLATION

CONFERENCE CALL

The conference function can connect up to four different users in one phonic communication. Only the intercom which made the fi rst call can call other intercom in the course of a conversation. In order to include another intercom in the conversation, simply dial the extension number. One of the following situations will occur:• The intercom door phone called is free: when the handset is lifted,

the called party will be included in the conversation in course.• The intercom door phone is free: if the handset is not lifted within 30

seconds, the call will not go through.• The intercom door phone called is engaged: there will be a busy

tone of a short duration.

FOLLOW-ME

This function allows incoming calls to be routed to another intercom. Up to a maximum of eight other intercoms can be routed to one intercom. Several consecutive reroutings of calls from one intercom can be made to several different intercoms.

How to forward calls from one intercom door phone to another• Go to the other intercom door phone.• Lift the handset of the other intercom.• Press the dedicated “F” key and dial the number of your intercom

door phone.• Listen for the tone on the handset; one of the following two situations

will take place: • Dial tone: the operation was successful → hang up. • Busy tone: calls cannot be routed because calls to 8 other

intercoms have already been forwarded to that intercom → hang up.

How to reset your intercom door phone• Return to your intercom.• Lift the handset.• Press the dedicated “F” key and dial your own number. • Hang up.

Secretary functionThis function permits the user to route his own incoming calls to another intercom (i.e. the secretary one). All his own incoming calls are routed to the secretary intercom EXCEPT the call that arrives from the same secretary. In this way the secretary can, if needed, “announce” the calls; anyway it cannot “transfer” the call. The routed set can always make outgoing calls (and then it can call again the person “announced” by the secretary). This function can be carried out by modifying the “follow me” as regard to the last paragraph (the crossed one).

GENERAL CALLS (only from authorized intercom door phone)

A general call can be made through a loudspeaker connected to a suitable amplifi er.The general call can take place at the same time as four other conversations, without interfering with them. General call can only be made from intercoms which were explicitly defi ned for making such calls during the programming phase.To make a general call: • Lift the handset.• Dial the special “99” number.• Wait for the “ding-dong” to be generated.• Make the announcement.• Redial the special “99” number.• Hang up.

ANSWERING A CALL FROM THE OUTDOOR STATION

This feature is only available on Ref. 926/2 intercom door phone.A call from the outdoor station produces a different acoustic signal from the normal one and can be easily recognized. Lift the handset to establish communication; the open-door key can be used to operate the electric lock at any point.

When a user, engaged in conversation with the outdoor station, receives a call from the inside, he visualize the call on the led without the possibility to be interrupted (not even with the clearing the line function).Vice versa, when a user, engaged in conversation with another internal user, receives a call from an outdoor station, he will see the blinking led up to the call key is pressed and he will hear an acoustic signal that indicates the call with more emphasis.

PROGRAMMING

All the intercom door phones are produced and tested by URMET DOMUS. They are all programmed with the following values during the testing phase:• Number: 98• General call function disabled: 0• Line clearing disabled: 0

The devices must all be programmed with two digits, e.g. from 01 to 09, from 10 to 19, from 20 to 25, or with any other number from 01 to 97.

These values can be changed at any time through the keypad by following the procedure described below:• Simultaneously press the “R” and the “F” keys for two seconds. If

one or two “beeps” are heard while the keys are pressed, it means that the two keys were not pressed simultaneously → repeat the operation.

• When the led is lit and a brief acoustic tone is heard, release the two keys.

• Enter the number to be assigned to the intercom.• The led will go off for a short interval and then go on again,

coinciding with a brief acoustic tone.• Set authorization (1) or disable (0) for the general call function.• The led will go off for a short interval and then go on again,

coinciding with a brief acoustic tone.• Set authorization (1) or disable (0) for the line clearing function.• The led goes off defi nitively, coinciding with a brief acoustic tone.

If the procedure described above is not completed within 30 seconds, the intercom will return to normal operating conditions, without storing the setting that were entered.

INSTALLATION

WIRES LAYING

All system intercom door phones must be interconnected in parallel using 9 wires (or 8 if the general call installation is not provided for). These wires have the following functions:• 1 for the power supply voltage + 12• 1 for the logical ground ML• 1 for the data line D• 4 for the 4 phonic lines L1, L2, L3, L4• 1 for the general call phonic line (this wire can be omitted on installations where this feature is not required) L5• 1 for the phonic ground MF

In addition, installations connected to a Call Station must be considered 4+N additional wires, which increase the number of wires to the installation to 13+N (where N depends on the number of call keys used – usually 1 or 2).These 4+N wires are used as follows: • 3 for the talk volume (F1, F2 and ground).• 1 for the door-opener.• N for the call.If the GENERAL call amplifi er is not used do not connect the wire L5.

The maximum distance between the power supply and the furthest intercom must be less than 200 meters.The maximum distance between two intercom door phones to ensure a relatively low cross-talk effect is 200 meters. The cross-talk effect increases progressively with an increase in distance.It is therefore advisable to avoid unnecessary connections distances.

EASIVOICE

EA

SIV

OIC

E S

YS

TE

ME

LE

CT

RO

NIC

INT

ER

CO

M S

YS

TE

M

sec.2 −−−− 7

EASIVOICE


Mo

d. 9

26


INSTALLATION

WIRE SECTION

The section of the wires to be used depends on the distance between the two intercoms furthest from the installation.Note carefully the following table:

Should it be necessary to have larger installations, it would be possible to resort to a solution in which more branches lead off from one point, as illustrated in the fi gure below. In this case, the cross-talk effect would remain unchanged within each individual branch ( the maximum distance between any two intercoms must therefore be less than 200 meters). However, intercoms on different branches would not have any effect on each other. This type of solution can also be used on normal installations, i.e. for short distances, to further reduce the cross-talk effect.

CONNECTION TO THE GENERAL CALL UNIT

A suitable amplifi er must be connected between the “A+” and the “A-” terminals of the power supply in order to equip the installation with a general call system. The amplifi er must have a 0,775 mV (or dBm) input with an input impedance greater than 50 Ohm and with its output power selected in function of the number and power of the loudspeakers to be used.It is recommended that the amplifi er be placed as close to the power supply as possible and be connected to it with a shielded cable.

CONNECTION TO THE CALL STATION

Installation can be made with up to two Call Stations with automatic switching (through a 788/1 relay box). Each Call Station must consists of a Loudspeaking Unit and a certain number of call keys. Power to the Call Station must be supplied separately by a dedicated power supply (e.g. Ref. 786/1A). Connections to the loudspeaking unit must be made through terminal 1A. The electric lock must be activated through a Ref. 788/21 repeater relay. The door-opener is always a “free door-opener”, i.e. the door can be opened at any time by pressing the door opener-key.

INSTALLATIONS WITH ONE CALL KEY

A basic installation is one in which several intercoms (type 926/2) are connected to a Call Station and can all answer a single call key. In this case, when there is a call, all 926/2 intercoms will ring at the same time. The fi rst intercom to answer will automatically exclude the other intercom, thus ensuring conversation privacy. The maximum number

of 926/2 intercoms which can be connected in parallel depends, in this case, on the total number of intercoms (926/1 + 926/2) in the installation.The following table summarizes the situation for standard installations with just one power supply.

Number of 926/2 Total numbers which can be connected of intercoms to a Call Station (926/1 + 926/2) on one call button

1 1 2 2 . . . . . . 15 15 16 16

17 15 18 14 19 14 20 13 21 12 22 12 23 11 24 10 25 10

Note that when the total number of intercom door phones in the installation is less than 16, they can all be type 926/2 and can be connected to the Call Station on the one call key. As the total number of intercoms in the installation is increased, the number of 926/2 which can be connected to a Call Station decreases progressively to 10.

INSTALLATIONS WITH TWO OR MORE CALL KEYS

This type of installation is used in small buildings (2/4/8/ apartments) where intercommunications and the “Follow-me” feature would be of interest. In this case, the cable conduit would be 8 (or 9) + 4 + N wires, which would limit possible applications to small user bases.Type 926/2 intercoms must be used. They must be grouped in several groups (usually 1, 2 or 3 units each), each of which is assigned to a call key. When there is a call, all intercoms within the same group will ring simultaneously. The fi rst intercom to answer will automatically exclude the other intercom door phone in that group, thus ensuring secrecy of conversation. The table in the previous section remains valid, even though the number of 926/2 intercoms that are connected to each call key is generally 1 or at maximum, 2 or 3, in this type of installation.

Max distance (meters) 50 100 200

Section (mm2) 0,50 0,80 1

R (Ohm/Km) 35 21,8 17,5

EASIVOICE

8 −−−− sec.2

EA

SIV

OIC

E S

YS

TE

M

EASIVOICE

BA

SIC

DIA

GR

AM

S


INTERCOM CONNECTION OF MAXIMUM 25 INTERCOM DOOR PHONESPossibility of general call service by means of loudspeakers

925

249

9

92

901

02

FEATURES

This system allows an intercom service up to 25 intercom door phones maximum and with possibility of 4 simultaneous and independent conversations.It is possible to make a general call by means of a 5th independent phonic channel.All the intercom door phones must be programmed with two digits, i.e. from 01 to 09, from 10 to 19, from 20 to 25, or any other number between 01 and 97.

Connect the GENERAL CALL installation only if necessary. It is recommended that the amplifi er be placed as close to the power supply as possible and be connected to it with a shielded cable. The power supply Ref. 926/3 is sized for an average installation of 25 intercoms. A larger number of intercoms will require additional power supplies connected in parallel, each of which will supply power to its own group of 25.It is recommended that the power supply Ref. 926/3 be placed at the center of the installation to minimize the cross-talk effect.

EQUIPMENT

For said installation (Scheme SC101-0313E) the following:

N. 25 Intercom door phones Ref. 926/1N. 1 Power supply Ref. 926/3

N. 1 Amplifi er Possible and not supplied by URMET DOMUSN. X Loudspeakers Possible and not supplied by URMET DOMUS

WIRES

As indicated in Scheme SC101-0313E.9 wires common to all the intercom door phones coming from the power supply are necessary.In case the amplifi er is not used for the GENERAL CALL, do not connect the wire L5 among the several intercoms. The common wires are reduced to 8.

DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)CY.001CY.002CY.003CY.004VX.008

sec.2 −−−− 9

EASIVOICE

BA

SIC

DIA

GR

AM

SE

AS

IVO

ICE

SY

ST

EM


COLLEGAMENTO INTERCOMUNICANTE DI UN MASSIMO DI INTERCOM CONNECTION OF MAXIMUM 25 INTERCOM DOOR PHONES

Possibility of general call service by means of loudspeakers

(CY.002)

(VX.008)

(CY.004)

ELECTRONIC INTERCOM SETS Mod.926

POWER SUPPLY

LINE˜

shielded cable

AMPLIFIER

LOUDSPEAKER

SC101-0313E

10 −−−− sec.2

EA

SIV

OIC

E S

YS

TE

M

EASIVOICE

BA

SIC

DIA

GR

AM

S


COLLEGAMENTO INTERCOMUNICANTE DI UN MASSIMO DI INTERCOM CONNECTION OF MAXIMUM 97 INTERCOM DOOR PHONES

Possibility of general call service by means of loudspeakers

7

2

22

977

2

50

7

7

2

25

26

7

7

2

75

76

7

2

2

2 2

7 22 22

517

2

201

FEATURES

This system allows an intercom service up to 97 intercom door phones maximum and with possibility of 4 simultaneous and independent conversations.It is possible to make a general call by means of a 5th independent phonic channel.The intercom door phones must all be programmed with two digits, i.e. from 01 to 09, from 10 to 19, from 20 to 25, or any other number between 01 and 97.

Connect the GENERAL CALL installation only if necessary. It is recommended that the amplifi er be placed as close to the power supply as possible and be connected to it with a shielded cable. The power supply Ref. 926/3 is sized for an average installation of 25 intercoms. A larger number of intercoms will require additional power supplies connected in parallel, each of which will supply power to its own group of 25.It is recommended that the power supply Ref. 926/3 be placed at the center of the installation to minimize the cross-talk effect.

EQUIPMENT

For said installation (Scheme SC101-0315E) the following:

N. 97 Intercom door phones Ref. 926/1N. 4 Power supplies Ref. 926/3


WIRES

As indicated in Scheme SC101-0315E.7 wires common to all the intercom door phones coming from the power supply are necessary.Each power supply feeds its group of 25 intercoms with 2 wires common to the intercoms of that group.In case the amplifi er is not used for the GENERAL CALL, do not connect the wire L5 among the several intercoms. The common wires are reduced to 6.

DIAGRAM NOTES


sec.2 −−−− 11

EASIVOICE

BA

SIC

DIA

GR

AM

SE

AS

IVO

ICE

SY

ST

EM


INTERCOM CONNECTION OF MAXIMUM 97 INTERCOM DOOR PHONESPossibility of general call service by means of loudspeakers

(VX.008)

(CY.002)

(VX.008)

(CY.002)

(VX.008)

(CY.002)

(VX.008)

(CY.002)

(CY.004)

ELECTRONIC INTERCOM SETS Mod.926

IV GROUP OF 22 SETS

III GROUP OF 25 SETS

II GROUP OF 25 SETS

I GROUP OF 25 SETS

I GROUP

II GROUP

III GROUP

IV GROUP

POWER SUPPLY

LINE~ shielded cable

AMPLIFIER

LOUDSPEAKER

SC101-0315E

12 −−−− sec.2

EA

SIV

OIC

E S

YS

TE

M

EASIVOICE

BA

SIC

DIA

GR

AM

S


INTERCOM CONNECTION OF MAXIMUM 16 INTERCOM DOOR PHONESWith possibility to answer to 1 outdoor station

All the intercom door phones are called in parallel from the outdoor station

1613

13

13

02

2

13

9

01

FEATURES

This system allows an intercom service up to 16 intercom door phones maximum and with possibility to answer to the calls coming from the outdoor station. It is possible to make 4 simultaneous conversations among the several intercoms plus one with the outdoor station. The outdoor station has only one call key. When it is pressed all the intercom door phones 926/2 ring simultaneously: the fi rst intercom that answers automatically excludes all the other ones, guaranteeing the secrecy of conversation.

The intercom door phones must all be programmed with two digits, i.e. from 01 to 09, from 10 to 19, from 20 to 25, or any other number between 01 and 97.

Due to absorption problems, no more than 16 intercoms can be called in parallel. It is recommended that the power supply Ref. 926/3 be placed at the center of the installation to minimize the cross-talk effect.

EQUIPMENT

For said installation (Scheme SC 101-0316G) the following:


N. 1 Power supply for door phone system 28VA Ref. 786/11 28VA Ref. 786/1 28VA Ref. 786/14 38VA Ref. 786/38N. 1 Relay Ref. 788/21


Mod. SinthesiN. 1 Module with door unit set-up Ref. 1145/21N. 1 Door unit Ref. 1145/500

Mod. K-SteelN. 1 Module with door unit Ref. 1155/21

Mod. 725N. 1 Panels with 1 button Ref. 725/101N. 1 Door unit Ref. 5150/500

Domus Aura model N. 1 Panels with 1 button Ref. 1110/1N. 1 Door unit Ref. 5150/500

NOTE: for correct installation of panels refer to “Door phone and Video door phone Product Technical Manual”.

WIRES

As indicated in Scheme SC101-0316G.13 wires common to all the intercom door phones are necessary, 8 of which coming from the power supply Ref. 926/3 and 5 from the push button panel, power supply and relay.

The electric lock will be released through the relay box Ref. 788/52.

DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)CY.001CY.002CY.003VX.008

sec.2 −−−− 13

EASIVOICE

BA

SIC

DIA

GR

AM

SE

AS

IVO

ICE

SY

ST

EM


INTERCOM CONNECTION OF MAXIMUM 16 INTERCOM DOOR PHONESWith possibility to answer to 1 outdoor station

All the intercom door phones are called in parallel from the outdoor station

L5

L4

L3

L2

L1

ML

+12

D MF

L5L4L3L2L1ML

+12 D MF

+A

CA 1 AP

-/~

-A

2

L5

L4

L3

L2

L1

ML

+12

D MF

CA 1 AP

-/~2

(CY.002)

(CY.003)

LU1G/T

~12

~0

~12

G/T ~0

21A

+ -1

ELECTRONIC INTERCOM SETS Mod.926 Ref.926/2

POWER SUPPLY

MAINS~

MAINS~

RELAY

ELECTRIC

LOCK

lock

release

POWER SUPPLY

FOR HOUSE

PHONE SYSTEM

Name tag

lighting

SC101-0316G

14 −−−− sec.2

EA

SIV

OIC

E S

YS

TE

M

EASIVOICE

BA

SIC

DIA

GR

AM

S


INTERCOM CONNECTION OF MAXIMUM 16 INTERCOM DOOR PHONESWith possibility to answer to 1 outdoor station The intercoms are divided in two

groups of 8. The outdoor station is equipped with two keys: with one of them it calls in parallel the 8 intercoms of group I, with the second one those of group II

1613

0813

13

13

0213

13

10

2

09

14

01

10

FEATURES

This system allows an intercom service up to 16 intercom door phones maximum and with possibility to answer to the calls coming from the outdoor station. It is possible to make 4 simultaneous conversations among the several intercoms plus one with the outdoor station.The outdoor station has only two call keys: with one of them it calls in parallel the 8 intercoms of group I, with the second one those of group II. The fi rst intercom that answers automatically exclude all the other ones, guaranteeing the secrecy of conversation.

The intercom door phones must be programmed with two digits, i.e. from 01 to 09, from 10 to 19, from 20 to 25, or any other number between 01 and 97.


EQUIPMENT

For said installation (Scheme SC 101-0361G) the following:


N. 1 Power supply for door phone system 28VA Ref. 786/11 28VA Ref. 786/1 28VA Ref. 786/14 38VA Ref. 786/38

N. 1 Call repeater relay Ref. 788/21


Mod. SinthesiN. 1 Module with door unit set-up Ref. 1145/22N. 1 Door unit Ref. 1145/500

Mod. K-SteelN. 1 Module with door unit Ref. 1155/22A

Mod. 725N. 1 Panels with 2 buttons Ref. 725/102N. 1 Door unit Ref. 5150/500

Domus Aura model N. 1 Panels with 2 buttons Ref. 1110/2N. 1 Door unit Ref. 5150/500


WIRES

As indicated in Scheme SC101-0361G.12 wires common to all the intercom door phones are necessary, 8 of which coming from the power supply Ref. 926/3 and 4 from the push button panel, power supply and relay.Moreover from the push button panel two other wires, for calls, start; each of them is connected in parallel to the 8 intercoms of the correspondent group.


DIAGRAM NOTES

(see section 1)CY.001CY.002CY.003VX.008

sec.2 −−−− 15

EASIVOICE

BA

SIC

DIA

GR

AM

SE

AS

IVO

ICE

SY

ST

EM


INTERCOM CONNECTION OF MAXIMUM 16 INTERCOM DOOR PHONESWith possibility to answer to 1 outdoor station The intercoms are divided in two

groups of 8. The outdoor station is equipped with two keys: with one of them it calls in parallel the 8 intercoms of group I, with the second one those of group II

L5

L4

L3

L2

L1

ML

+12

D MF

L5

L4

L3

L2

L1

ML

+12 D MF

+A

CA 1 AP

-/~

(CY.002)

(CY.003)

-A

2

L5

L4

L3

L2

L1

ML

+12

D MF

CA 1 AP

-/~2

LU1

G/T

~12

~0

~12

G/T ~0

21A

+ -1U2

ELECTRONIC INTERCOM SETS Mod.926-Ref.926/2

POWER SUPPLY

MAINS~

MAINS~ CALL REPEATER RELAY

POWER SUPPLY

FOR DOOR

PHONE SYSTEM

ELECTRIC

LOCK

lock

release

Name tag

lighting

SC101-0361G

16 −−−− sec.2

EA

SIV

OIC

E S

YS

TE

M

EASIVOICE

BA

SIC

DIA

GR

AM

S


INTERCOM CONNECTION OF MAXIMUM 16 INTERCOM DOOR PHONESWith possibility to answer to 1 outdoor station. The intercoms are called separately

from theoutdoor station. Possibility of paging service by means of loudspeakers

1409

14

13+n-7

13+n-8

13+n-9

08

0214

1514

1414

13+n-1

13+n-2 13+n-14

14

2

16

9+n

13+n

01

2

FEATURES

This system allows an intercom service up to 16 intercom door phones maximum and with possibility to answer to the calls coming from the outdoor station. It is possible to make 4 simultaneous conversations among the several intercoms plus one with the outdoor station.The outdoor station calls the several intercoms separately.The intercom door phones must all be programmed with two digits, i.e. from 01 to 09, from 10 to 19, from 20 to 25, or any other number between 01 and 97.

The GENERAL CALL must be connected only if necessary. It is recommended to place the amplifi er as close as possible to the power supply and to connect them with a shielded cable.


EQUIPMENT

For said installation (Scheme SC101-0382F) the following:


N. 1 Power supply for door phone system 28VA Ref. 786/11 28VA Ref. 786/1 28VA Ref. 786/14 38VA Ref. 786/38

N. 1 Call repeater relay Ref. 788/21



Mod. SinthesiN. 1 Module with door unit set-up Ref. 1145/20-/21-/22N. 1 Door unit Ref. 1145/500N. X Button modules Ref. 1145/11-/12-/13-/14

Mod. K-SteelN. 1 Module with door unit Ref. 1155/20-/21-/22AN. X Button modules Ref. 1155/11-/12A-/13A-/14A

Mod. 725N. 1 Panels with 2 buttons Ref. 725/102N. 1 Door unit Ref. 5150/500

Domus Aura model N. 1 Panels with 2 buttons Ref. 1110/2N. 1 Door unit Ref. 5150/500


WIRES

As indicated in Scheme SC101-0382F.13 wires common to all the intercom door phones are necessary, 9 of which coming from the power supply Ref. 926/3 and 4 from the push button panel, power supply and relay.Moreover from the push button panel all single call wires start towards each intercom.In case the amplifi er is not used for the GENERAL CALL, do not connect the wire L5 among the several intercoms. The common wires are reduced to 12.


DIAGRAM NOTES


sec.2 −−−− 17

EASIVOICE

BA

SIC

DIA

GR

AM

SE

AS

IVO

ICE

SY

ST

EM


INTERCOM CONNECTION OF MAXIMUM 16 INTERCOM DOOR PHONESWith possibility to answer to 1 outdoor station. The intercoms are called separately

from theoutdoor station. Possibility of paging service by means of loudspeakers

L5

L4

L3

L2

L1

ML

+12

D MF

CA 1 AP

-/~

(CY.003)

2

L5

L4

L3

L2

L1

ML

+12

D MF

CA 1 AP

-/~2

(CY.004)

L5

L4

L3

L2

L1

ML

+12 D MF

(CY.002)

+A

-A

(C4.007)

(C4.008)

LU1G/T

~12

~0

~12

G/T ~0

21A

+ -1U2

G/T ~0

~12

~0

~12

U2U1

G/T

U3U4

ELECTRONIC INTERCOM SETS Mod.926-Ref.926/2

POWER SUPPLY

MAINS~

MAINS~

POWER SUPPLY FOR

DOOR PHONE SYSTEM

ELECTRIC

LOCK

lock

release

AMPLIFIER

LOUDSPEAKER

TO THE

FOLLOWING

MODULE

CALL REPEATER RELAY

SC101-0382F

18 −−−− sec.2

EA

SIV

OIC

E S

YS

TE

M

EASIVOICE

BA

SIC

DIA

GR

AM

S


Today, you can observe, retrieve information, choose and add all Urmet Domus products to your system estimate with a few simply clicks of a mouse on your computer without having to browse, read and understand catalogues and manuals.This and more thanks to our “Domus Draw” program which has now become an indispensable working tool for professionals (installers, wholesalers, retrofi tters, architects, etc.).

Domus Draw implements a few, simple commands for:

• Creating and saving all system estimates either automatically and/or manually.

• Printing estimates to paper or pdf fi le.

• Creating system estimates using different user modes.

• Retrieving information about systems and applications by consulting instruction booklets and technical documents of the various products or consulting the wiring diagrams of the system to be created.

• Watching demo footage with sound for easily understanding how to use the program.

• Connecting to the Urmet Domus web site to fi nd out about new features and get real-time updates.

• Searching for cost-effective, ready-to-use kits which can be adapted to your system needs.

• Saving and printing all your customer data in a specifi c database.

• Browsing a comprehensive photograph and description database presenting all Urmet Domus products in detail.

Accessing these functions is very easy: just press the corresponding function button on the program home page:

“Domus Draw” can be downloaded free of charge from www.urmetdomus.com

Download

FREE

VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS: Installation Diagrams - Interfoni System Diagrams.pdf · i index door...

Documents

Transcript of VIDEO DOOR PHONE SYSTEMS: Installation Diagrams - Interfoni System Diagrams.pdf · i index door...